Yamaha RX V473 Owner's Manual

RX-V573 Owner's Manual RX-V573_manual

User Manual: Yamaha RX-V473 Owner's Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 133

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

AV Receiver

Owner’s Manual

English

Read the supplied booklet “Safety Brochure” before using the unit.

CONTENTS
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

7 Connecting recording devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
8 Connecting the power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

FEATURES

5

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO) . . . . . . . . . 30

What you can do with the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Part names and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Front display (indicators) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

PLAYBACK

34

Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Basic playback procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

PREPARATIONS

11

General setup procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Switching information on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch
(SCENE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Configuring scene assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

1 Placing speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Selecting the sound mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

2 Connecting speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
7.1-channel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Connecting front speakers that support bi-amp connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting Zone B speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Input/output jacks and cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Enjoying unprocessed playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (direct playback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Enjoying compressed music with enhanced sound (Compressed Music Enhancer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Enjoying surround sound with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Listening to FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Setting the frequency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

3 Connecting a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Selecting a frequency for reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4 Connecting playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Registering favorite radio stations (presets) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Radio Data System tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Playing back iPod music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Playback of iPod content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

6 Connecting to a network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Connecting a USB storage device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
En

2

Playback of USB storage device contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Controlling external devices with the remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Registering the remote control code for a TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Media sharing setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Registering the remote control codes for playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Playback of PC music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Resetting remote control codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Listening to Internet radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Updating the unit’s firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay) . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

APPENDIX

86

Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Preparing Zone B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources
(Option menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Option menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Power and system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

CONFIGURATIONS

66

FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Configuring various functions (Setup menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Error indications on the front display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

USB and network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Setup menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Audio information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

HDMI and video information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Yamaha technologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Video signal flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Information on HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

HDMI Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu) . . . . . . . . 80

HDMI signal compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

ADVANCED SETUP menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Reference diagram (rear panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Restoring the default settings (INIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Updating the firmware (UPDATE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Checking the firmware version (VERSION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

En

3

Accessories

Operating range of the remote control

Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.

• Point the remote control at the remote control sensor on the unit and remain within the operating range
shown below.

Remote control

Batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

Within 6 m (20 ft)
30°

30°

Insert the batteries the right
way round.

AM antenna

FM antenna

*One of the above is supplied depending on the region of
purchase.

YPAO microphone

CD-ROM (Owner’s Manual)
• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this manual are of the RX-V573 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.

• Some features are not available in certain regions.
• Due to product improvements, specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice.
• This manual explains operations using the supplied remote control.

Easy Setup Guide

Safety Brochure

• This manual describes all the “iPod”, “iPhone” and “iPad” as the “iPod”. “iPod” refers to “iPod”, “iPhone”
and “iPad”, unless otherwise specified.
•

indicates precautions for use of the unit and its feature limitations.

•

indicates supplementary explanations for better use.

Accessories

En

4

FEATURES
What you can do with the unit
Wide variety of supported content
• iPod/iPhone/iPad

. p.46

• USB

. p.50

• Media server (PC/NAS)

. p.53

• Internet radio

. p.56

• AirPlay

. p.58

Supports 2- to 5.1-channel (to 7.1-channel*)
speaker system. Allows you to enjoy your favorite
acoustic spaces in various styles.
• Automatically optimizing the speaker . p.30
settings to suit your room (YPAO)
• Reproducing stereo or multichannel
sounds with the sound fields like
actual movie theaters and concert
halls (CINEMA DSP)

*

*

. p.37

• Enjoying compressed music with
. p.41
enhanced sound (Compressed Music
Enhancer)
• Playing back music in multiple rooms . p.60
(Zone B)*

Network contents

* RX-V573 only

Speakers
Audio

iPod/iPhone/iPad

Audio
HDMI Control

USB device

3D and 4K signals supported

Audio
HDMI Control
Video

BD/DVD player

Audio/Video

Change the input source
and favorite settings with
one touch (SCENE)

Operating external
devices with the supplied
remote control

. p.82

TV

AV receiver (the unit)

The unit’s
remote control

. p.35

Sequential operation of a TV,
AV receiver, and BD/DVD
player (HDMI Control)
TV remote control

. p.96

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

En

5

Full of useful functions!

Useful tips

❑ Connecting various devices (p.23)

❑ Creating 3-dimensional sound fields (p.37)

A number of HDMI jacks and various input/output jacks
on the unit allow you to connect video devices (such as
BD/DVD players), audio devices (such as CD players),
game consoles, camcorders, and other devices.

The Virtual Presence Speaker (VPS) function allows you
to create a 3-dimensional sound field in your own room
(CINEMA DSP 3D).

The combination of video/audio input jacks does not
match an external device...
Use “Audio In” in the “Option” menu to change the
combination of video/audio input jacks so that it matches
the output jack(s) of your external device (p.24).
Video and audio are not synchronized...
Use “Lipsync” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the delay
between video and audio output (p.74).

BD/DVD
player

I want to hear audio from the TV speakers...
Use “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu to select the
output destination of signals input into the unit (p.72).
Your TV speakers may be selected as an output
destination.

CD player

Game
console

I want to change the on-screen menu language...
Use “Language” in the “Setup” menu to select a
language from English, French, German, Spanish,
Russian and Chinese (p.29).
Camcorder
TV

Set-top box

❑ Playing back TV audio in surround sound
with a single HDMI cable connection
(Audio Return Channel: ARC) (p.18)
When using an ARC -compatible TV, you only need one
HDMI cable to enable video output to the TV, audio input
from the TV, and the transmission of HDMI Control signals.
HDMI Control
TV audio

❑ Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42)

I want to update the firmware...

The unit is equipped with a built-in FM/AM tuner. You
can register up to 40 favorite radio stations as presets.

Use “Network Update” (p.85) in the “Setup” menu or
“UPDATE” (p.81) in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu to
update the unit’s firmware.

❑ Enjoying pure high fidelity sound (p.40)

Many other settings are available that let you to
customize the unit. For details, see the following pages.

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit
plays back the selected source with the least circuitry,
which lets you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

• Scene settings (p.35)

❑ Easy operation with a TV screen
You can operate the iPod or USB storage device, view
information, or easily configure the settings using the
on-screen menu.

• Sound/video settings and signal information for each
source (p.62)
• Various function settings (p.67)
• System settings (p.80)

❑ Low power consumption
Video from
external device

The ECO mode (power saving function) reduces the
unit’s power consumption and helps to create an
eco-friendly home theater system (p.76).

FEATURES ➤ What you can do with the unit

En

6

Part names and functions
Front panel
1

2

3

4

5 6

7

8

9

:

A

YPAO MIC

DIRECT

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM

AM

TUNING

VOLUME
SCENE

BD
DVD

PHONES

INPUT

TV

TONE CONTROL

NET

PROGRAM

RADIO

STRAIGHT

SILENT CINEMA

B
1 z (power) key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

2 Standby indicator
Lights up when the unit is in standby mode under any of the
following conditions.
• HDMI Control is enabled (p.72)
• Standby Through is enabled (p.72)
• Network Standby is enabled (p.78)
• An iPod is being charged (p.46)

3 YPAO MIC jack
For connecting the supplied YPAO microphone (p.30).

4 Remote control sensor
Receives remote control signals (p.4).

5 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34).

6 MEMORY key
Registers FM/AM radio stations as preset stations (p.43).

VIDEO AUX

VIDEO

AUDIO

C

D E F

G

H

USB

iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A

I

7 PRESET keys
Select a preset FM/AM radio station (p.44).

8 FM and AM keys
Switch between FM and AM (p.42).

9 TUNING keys
Select the radio frequency (p.42).

0 Front display
Displays information (p.8).

A DIRECT key
Enables/disables the direct playback mode (p.40).

B PHONES jack
For connecting headphones.

C INPUT keys
Select an input source.

D TONE CONTROL key

J
E SCENE keys
Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.35).

F PROGRAM keys
Select a sound program or a surround decoder (p.36).

G STRAIGHT key
Enables/disables the straight decode mode (p.39).

H VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting devices, such as camcorders and game
consoles (p.26).

I USB jack
For connecting a USB storage device (p.50) or an iPod
(p.46).

J VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume.

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency range
of output sounds (p.63).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

En

7

Front display (indicators)

1

2

3

4

5

ENHANCER ADAPTIVE DRC
STEREO
3 TUNED

OUT

6

7

8

SLEEP
SP A
SP B

9

VOL.
MUTE
SW
C

L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR

:

1 HDMI
Lights up when HDMI signals are being input or output.

OUT
Lights up when HDMI signals are being output.

2 CINEMA DSP
Lights up when CINEMA DSP (p.37) is working.

CINEMA DSP n
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39) is working.

3 ENHANCER
Lights up when Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41) is
working.

4 ADAPTIVE DRC
Lights up when Adaptive DRC (p.63) is working.

5 STEREO
Lights up when the unit is receiving a stereo FM radio signal.

A

6 ZONE indicators (RX-V573 only)
“SP A” lights up when the Zone A speaker output is enabled
and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B speaker output is
enabled (p.61).

7 SLEEP
Lights up when the sleep timer is on.

8 MUTE
Blinks when audio is muted.

9 Volume indicator
Indicates the current volume.

0 Cursor indicators
Indicate the remote control cursor keys currently operational.

>

B

B Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are output.
L Subwoofer
A Front speaker (L)
S Front speaker (R)
D Center speaker
F Surround speaker (L)
G Surround speaker (R)
H Surround back speaker (L)*
J Surround back speaker (R)*
K Surround back speaker*
* RX-V573 only

A Information display
Displays the current status (such as input name and sound
mode name). You can switch the information by pressing
INFO (p.34).

TUNED
Lights up when the unit is receiving an FM/AM radio station
signal.

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

En

8

Rear panel
1

3

2

4

5
(RX-V573 U.S.A. model)

HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

NETWORK

ARC

ANTENNA
AM

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PB

PB

SPEAKERS
FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

6

AV
OUT

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

7 8 9 :

1 HDMI OUT jack
For connecting to an HDMI-compatible TV and outputting
video/audio signals (p.18). When using ARC, TV audio signal
can also be input through the HDMI OUT jack.

2 HDMI 1–4 jacks
For connecting to HDMI-compatible playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).

3 ANTENNA jacks
For connecting to FM and AM antennas (p.26).

4 NETWORK jack
For connecting to a network (p.27).

5 Power cable
For connecting to an AC wall outlet (p.28).

6 AV 1–6 jacks
For connecting to video/audio playback devices and
inputting video/audio signals (p.23).

A
7 AV OUT jacks
For outputting video/audio to a recording device (such as a
VCR) (p.28).

B

* The area around the video/audio output jacks is
marked in white on the actual product to
prevent improper connections.

A SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting to speakers (p.15).

8 AUDIO jacks
For connecting to an audio playback device and inputting
audio signals (p.25).

9 SUBWOOFER jack
For connecting to a subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) (p.15).

0 MONITOR OUT jacks
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks:

• The SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks are available on
RX-V573 only.

B VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
Selects the switch position according to your local voltage
(p.28).

For connecting to a TV that supports component video and
outputting video signals (p.22).

VIDEO jack:
For connecting to a TV that supports composite video and
outputting video signals (p.22).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

En

9

Remote control
1 Remote control signal transmitter

1

Transmits infrared signals.
CODE SET

2

SOURCE RECEIVER

E

Turns on/off an external device.

SOURCE/RECEIVER key
HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

Changes the device (the unit or external device) that is
operated with the remote control (p.83). You can operate the
unit when this key lights up in orange, and an external device
when this key lights up in green.

AV

3

2 SOURCE z key

1

F

RECEIVER z key
Turns on/off (standby) the unit.

ZONE

3 Input selection keys

TUNER

4

FM

AM

5

INFO

MEMORY

6

MOVIE

MUSIC

7

SLEEP

8
9
:

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

G

OPTION

SETUP

4 Radio keys
VOLUME

ENTER

RETURN

H

DISPLAY

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

1

C

DIRECT

SCENE

TOP
MENU

A
B

TUNING

Select an input source for playback.
HDMI 1–4
HDMI 1–4 jacks
AV 1–6
AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO
AUDIO jacks
V-AUX
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
USB
USB jack (on the front panel)
NET
NETWORK jack (press repeatedly to select a
desired network source)
TUNER
FM/AM radio

2

3

4

I

Operate the FM/AM radio when “TUNER” is selected as the
input source (p.42).
FM
Switches to FM radio.
AM
Switches to AM radio.
MEMORY
Registers FM/AM radio stations as presets.
PRESET
Select a preset station.
TUNING
Select the radio frequency.

5 INFO key
Selects the information displayed on the front display (p.34).

5

6

7

9

0

10

8

6 Sound mode keys
ENT

Select a sound mode (p.36).

TV

D

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

7 SLEEP key
Switches the unit to standby mode automatically after a
specified period of time has elapsed (sleep timer). Press
repeatedly to set the time (120 min, 90 min, 60 min, 30 min,
off).

MUTE

9 SETUP key
Displays the setup menu (p.66).

0 Menu operation keys
Cursor keys Select a menu or a parameter.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen.

A MODE key
Switches between “Stereo” and “Mono” for FM radio
reception (p.42).
Switches the iPod operation modes (p.48).

B External device operation keys
Let you play back and select menus and perform other
operations for external devices (p.83).

C Numeric keys
Let you enter numerical values, such as radio frequencies.

D TV operation keys
Let you select TV input and volume, and perform other TV
operations (p.82).

E CODE SET button
Registers remote control codes of external devices on the
remote control (p.82).

F ZONE keys (RX-V573 only)
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A or Zone B (p.61).

★/★★ keys (RX-V473 only)
Change the external device to be controlled without
switching the input source (p.83).

G OPTION key
Displays the option menu (p.62).

H VOLUME keys
Adjust the volume.

I MUTE key
Mutes the audio output.

• To operate external devices with the remote control, register a
remote control code for each device before using (p.82).

8 SCENE keys
(RX-V573)

Select the registered input source and sound program with
one touch. Also, turns on the unit when it is in standby mode
(p.35).

FEATURES ➤

Part names and functions

En

10

PREPARATIONS
General setup procedure
1 Placing speakers (p.12)

Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place them in your room.

2 Connecting speakers (p.15)

Connect the speakers to the unit.

3 Connecting a TV (p.18)

Connect a TV to the unit.

4 Connecting playback devices (p.23)

Connect video devices (such as BD/DVD players) and audio devices (such as CD players) to the unit.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas (p.26)

Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.

6 Connecting to a network (p.27)

Connect the unit to a network.

7 Connecting recording devices (p.28)

Connect recording devices to the unit.

8 Connecting the power cable (p.28)

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.

9

Selecting an on-screen menu language
(p.29)

Select the desired on-screen menu language (default: English).

10

Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically (YPAO) (p.30)

Optimize the speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room
(YPAO).

This completes all the preparations. Enjoy playing movies, music, radio and other content with the unit!

PREPARATIONS

➤ General setup procedure

En

11

1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 Placing speakers
Select the speaker layout for the number of speakers that you are using and place the speakers and subwoofer (with built-in amplifier) in your room. This section describes the
representative speaker layout examples.
Caution
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.
For details, see “Setting the speaker impedance” (p.14).
• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω.

Speaker system (the number of channels)
Speaker type
Front (L)

Abbr.

Function

1

Front (R)

2

Center

3

Surround (L)

4

Surround (R)

5

Produce front right/left channel sounds (stereo sounds).
Produces center channel sounds (such as movie dialogue and vocals).
Produce surround right/left channel sounds.

Surround back (L)*

6

Surround back (R)*

7

Surround back*

8

Produces sounds mixed from surround back left/right channel sounds.

9

Produces LFE (low-frequency effect) channel sounds and reinforces the bass parts of other channels.
This channel is counted as “0.1”.

Subwoofer

Produce surround back left/right channel sounds.

7.1*

6.1*

5.1

4.1

3.1

2.1

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●
●
●
●

●

●

●

* RX-V573 only

• RX-V573 supports 2- to 7.1-channel system, and RX-V473 supports 2- to 5.1-channel speaker system.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Placing speakers

En

12

1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

7.1-channel system (RX-V573 only)

1

9

5.1-channel system

1

2

3

9

4

5

10° to 30°

3

4

10° to 30°

6

2

5

10° to 30°

10° to 30°

7

30 cm (1 ft) or more

6.1-channel system (RX-V573 only)

1

9

4.1-channel system

1

2

3

9

4

5

10° to 30°

2

10° to 30°

4

5

10° to 30°

10° to 30°

8

PREPARATIONS

➤ Placing speakers

En

13

1 Speaker placement 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Setting the speaker impedance

3.1-channel system

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

1

9

2

3

Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm speakers. When connecting
6-ohm speakers, set the speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. In this case, you can also
use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

1

Before connecting speakers, connect the power cable to an AC wall
outlet.

2

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).
z (power)

STRAIGHT

3
2.1-channel system

SPIMP.8MIN
1

9

Check that “SP IMP.” is displayed on the front display.

2

4
5

Press STRAIGHT to select “6 Ω MIN”.
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and remove the
power cable from the AC wall outlet.

You are now ready to connect the speakers.

PREPARATIONS

➤ Placing speakers

En

14

1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

2 Connecting speakers
Connect the speakers placed in your room to the unit.
The following diagrams provide connections for 5.1and 7.1-channel systems as examples. For other
systems, connect speakers while referring to the
connection diagram for the 5.1-channel system.

5.1-channel system

7.1-channel system
(RX-V573 only)

The unit (rear)

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS

PB
FRONT

Caution

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B

SPEAKERS
PB
FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B

SINGLE

Y

• Remove the unit’s power cable from an AC wall outlet and turn
off the subwoofer before connecting the speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
one another or come into contact with the unit’s metal parts.
Doing so may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker
cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front
display when the unit is turned on.

SINGLE

Y

OR OUT

OR OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUBWOOFER

Cables required for connection
(commercially available)
Speaker cables (x the number of speakers)
+
–

+
–

1

2

1

2

Audio pin cable (x1: for connecting a subwoofer)
9

4

3

9

5

3

4

5
6

7

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the
SINGLE jack (L side).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

En

15

1 2 Speaker connections 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting
the negative (-) terminal of the unit and the speaker, and
the other is for the positive (+) terminal. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminal.
a Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8”) of insulation from
the ends of the speaker cable and twist the bare wires of
the cable firmly together.
b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.

Connecting front speakers that
support bi-amp connections
(RX-V573 only)
When using front speakers that support bi-amp
connections, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP/ZONE B jacks.
To enable the bi-amp function, set “Power Amp Assign”
(p.69) in the “Setup” menu to “BI-AMP” after connecting
the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

c

FR
ON

T

d

Connecting Zone B speakers
(RX-V573 only)

d Tighten the terminal.

b

• Surround back speakers cannot be used during bi-amp
connections.

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

+ (red)

Caution
• Before making bi-amp connections, remove any brackets or
cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the
instruction manual of the speakers for details. If you are not
making bi-amp connections, make sure that the brackets or
cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables.

The Zone A/B function allows you to playback an input
source in the room where the unit is installed (Zone A)
and in another room (Zone B). To connect the Zone B
speakers, see “Playing back music in multiple rooms
(RX-V573 only)” (p.60).

a

- (black)

Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia and General models only)
a Tighten the speaker terminal.
b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.

Banana plug

a

1

FR
ON
T

2

3
9

b
4

5

■ Connecting the subwoofer
Use an audio pin cable to connect the subwoofer.
MONIT

Audio pin cable
AV6

Y
OR OU

T

AV
OUT
AUDIO

SUBW
OOFER

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting speakers

En

16

Input/output jacks and cables
■ Video/audio jacks
❑ HDMI jacks

❑ VIDEO jacks

❑ AUDIO jacks

Transmit analog video signals. Use a video pin cable.

(Stereo L/R jacks)

Video pin cable

Transmit digital video and digital sound through a single
jack. Use an HDMI cable.

Transmit analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo pin
cable.
Stereo pin cable

HDMI cable

■ Audio jacks
❑ OPTICAL jacks
• Use a 19-pin HDMI cable with the HDMI logo. We recommend using
a cable less than 5.0 m (16.4 ft) long to prevent signal quality
degradation.
• To connect a device that has a DVI jack, an HDMI/DVI-D cable is
required.

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital optical
cable. Remove the tip protector (if available) before
using the cable.

(Stereo mini jack)
Transmits analog stereo audio signals. Use a stereo
mini-plug cable.
Stereo mini-plug cable

Digital optical cable
• The unit’s HDMI jacks support the HDMI Control, Audio Return
Channel (ARC), and 3D and 4K video transmission (through output)
features.

OPTICAL
( TV )

AV 4

• Use high speed HDMI cables to enjoy 3D or 4K videos.

❑ COAXIAL jacks

■ Video jacks

Transmit digital audio signals. Use a digital coaxial
cable.

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

Digital coaxial cable

Transmit video signals separated into three
components: luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB),
and chrominance red (PR). Use a component video
cable with three plugs.
Component video cable

PREPARATIONS ➤

Input/output jacks and cables

En

17

1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3 Connecting a TV
Connect a TV to the unit so that video input to the unit can be output to the TV.
You can also enjoy playback of TV audio on the unit.
The connection method varies depending on the functions and video input jacks
available on your TV.
Refer to the instruction manual of the TV and choose a connection method.

Does your TV support
Audio Return Channel (ARC)?

Yes

■ Connection Method 1 (p.18)

About Audio Return Channel (ARC)

Yes

■ Connection Method 2 (p.20)

■ Connection Method 1 (HDMI Control/ARC-compatible TV)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable.

No

Does your TV have an
HDMI input jack?

HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV
that supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit’s
power and volume with the TV’s remote control. You can also control playback
devices (such as an HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD player) connected to the
unit with an HDMI cable. For details, see “HDMI Control” (p.96).

ARC allows audio signals to travel both ways under HDMI Control. If you connect a
TV that supports HDMI Control and ARC to the unit with a single HDMI cable, you
can output video/audio to the TV or input TV audio to the unit.

No

Does your TV support
HDMI Control?

About HDMI Control

Yes

■ Connection Method 3 (p.21)

No

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.72) in the “Setup” menu.

HDMI OUT jack

The unit (rear)

HDMI input
(ARC-compatible)

HDMI OUT

■ Connection Method 4 (p.22)

HDMI OUT

HDMI

HDM

HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)

ARC

ARC

HDMI

ARC

HDMI

ANTEN
AM

When connecting a video device with an analog video output

PR

PB

• If you will connect any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit, you also
need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks (p.22).
• If you will connect any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) of the
unit, you also need to connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack (p.22).

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

TV

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

En

18

1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
❑ Necessary settings
To use HDMI Control and ARC, you need to configure the following settings.

3

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.

For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

1

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback devices)
and the power cable to the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

2

Configure the settings of the unit.

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV’s main power.
d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

a Check that ARC is enabled on the TV.
b Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.
c Press SETUP.

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP

On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

OPTION

SETUP

e Check the following.

SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER

POP UP

d Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.

f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.
If you cannot hear the TV’s audio, check that “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.

Setup
Speaker

Configuration

HDMI

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.

Sound
ECO
Function

• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.

Network
Language

• If the audio is interrupted while using ARC, set “ARC” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu to “Off” and use a digital
optical cable to input TV audio to the unit (p.20).

e Press ENTER again.
f Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.

• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks,
use “TV Audio Input” (p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the
SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

Configuration
HDMI Control

On

Audio Output

Auto

Standby Through

Auto

TV Audio Input

AV4

Standby Sync

Auto

ARC

On

SCENE
Back: RETURN

g Press SETUP.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

En

19

1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Connection Method 2 (HDMI Control-compatible TV)

❑ Necessary settings

Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.

To use HDMI Control, you need to configure the following settings.
For details on settings and operating your TV, refer to the instruction manual for the TV.

• The following explanation is based on the assumption that you have not changed the “HDMI” parameters
(p.72) in the “Setup” menu.

The unit (rear)

1

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit, TV, and
playback devices.

2

Configure the settings of the unit.

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input
HDMI OUT

HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

(BD/DVD)

ARC

ARC

HDMI

a Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

HDMI

ANTENNA
AM

FM

b Press SETUP.

PR

PB

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

OPTION

SETUP

VIDEO

OPTICAL
OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

OPTICAL

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

O

O
VOLUME

ENTER

A
(TV)
O

AV 4

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output
(digital optical)

TV

RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP

SETUP
Cursor keys
ENTER

POP UP

c Use the cursor keys to select “HDMI” and press ENTER.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.

Setup
Speaker

Configuration

HDMI
Sound
ECO
Function
Network
Language

d Press ENTER again.
e Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “HDMI Control” and the cursor keys (e/r) to
select “On” as shown below.

Configuration
HDMI Control

On

Audio Output

Auto

Standby Through

Auto

TV Audio Input

AV4

Standby Sync

Auto

ARC

On

SCENE
Back: RETURN

f Press SETUP.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

En

20

1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

3

Configure the settings for HDMI Control.
a Enable HDMI Control on the TV and playback devices (such as a HDMI
Control-compatible BD/DVD player).

■ Connection Method 3 (TV with HDMI input jacks)
Connect the TV to the unit with an HDMI cable and a digital optical cable.
The unit (rear)

HDMI OUT jack
HDMI input

b Turn off the TV’s main power and then turn off the unit and playback devices.

HDMI OUT
HDMI OUT

c Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI

(BD/DVD)

ARC

ARC

HDMI

d Switch the TV input to display video from the unit.

HDMI

ANTENNA
AM

FM

PR

e Check the following.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected. If not,
select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.
f Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning off the TV or
adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

This completes the necessary settings.
If you select a TV program with the TV remote control, the input source of the unit will be
automatically switched to “AV 4” and the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try turning off and on (or unplugging and then plugging in again)
the devices. It may solve the problem.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.

PB

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

OPTICAL
OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

OPTICAL

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

O

O

A
(TV)
O

AV 4

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

Audio output
(digital optical)

TV

If you switch the input source of the unit to “AV 4” using the AV 4 or SCENE(TV) keys,
the TV audio will be played back on the unit.

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can navigate the iPod, USB storage device and
network sources, or configure the settings of the unit with the menu displayed on the TV.
• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the
SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

• “AV 4” is set as TV audio input at the factory. If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or
if you want to use another input jack (other than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, use “TV Audio Input”
(p.72) in the “Setup” menu to change the TV audio input assignment. To use the SCENE function (p.35),
you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

En

21

1 2 3 TV connection 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Connection Method 4 (TV without HDMI input jacks)

❑ VIDEO (composite video) connection (with a video pin cable)

When connecting any video device to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the
unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.

The unit (rear)

When connecting any video device to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks or the VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO) jack of the unit, connect the TV to the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

HDMI OUT

If you select “AV 4” as the input source by pressing AV 4 or SCENE(TV), the TV audio
will be played back on the unit.

• If you connect your TV to the unit with a cable other than HDMI, video input to the unit via HDMI cannot be
output to the TV.
• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack
HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

Video input
(composite video)

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

VIDEO

ARC

V
V

ANTENNA
AM

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

PR

PR

PB

PB

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL
OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

O

O

(TV)

AV 4

• If you have connected any external device to the AV 4 jacks or if you want to use another input jack (other
than OPTICAL) for connecting the TV, connect the TV to one of the AV 1–6 and AUDIO jacks. To use the
SCENE function (p.35), you also need to change the input assignment for SCENE(TV).

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

TV
Audio output
(digital optical)

❑ COMPONENT VIDEO connection (with a component video cable)
Video input
(component video)
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR

COMPONENT
VIDEO

The unit (rear)

PR

HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

PR

PR

PB

PB

Y

Y

PB

PB
ARC

Y

ANTENNA
AM

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

Y
MONITOR OUT

PR

PB

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL
COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

OPTICAL

SUBWOOFER

O

O

AUDIO

(TV)

AV 4

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

TV
Audio output
(digital optical)

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting a TV

En

22

1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10

4 Connecting playback devices
The unit is equipped with a variety of input jacks including HDMI input jacks to allow
you to connect different types of playback devices. For information on how to connect
an iPod or a USB storage device, see the following pages.
– Connecting an iPod (p.46)

■ Component video connection
Connect a video device to the unit with a component video cable and an audio cable
(digital optical or digital coaxial). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit) depending on
the audio output jacks available on your video device.

– Connecting a USB storage device (p.50)
Output jacks on video device

Connecting video devices (such as BD/DVD players)
Connect video devices such as BD/DVD players, set-top boxes (STBs) and game
consoles to the unit. Depending on the video/audio output jacks available on your video
device, choose one of the following connections. We recommend using an HDMI
connection if the video device has an HDMI output jack.

• If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your video device, change
its combination according to the output jacks of your device (p.24).

Input jacks on the unit
Video

Audio
Digital optical

AV 1 (COMPONENT VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Component video

Video output
(component video)

AV 1–2
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
jacks

COMPONENT
VIDEO

The unit (rear)

■ HDMI connection

PR
PR
HDMI OUT

Connect a video device to the unit with an HDMI cable.

ARC

HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)

PB

PR

PR

PB

PB

Y

Y

PB
Y

AM

HDMI 1–4 jacks
HDMI 1

HDMI 2

HDMI 3

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PB

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

O

O

C

C

OPTICAL
OPTICAL

AV 1
HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI output

HDMI

ARC

ANTENNA
FM

HDMI

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PB

PB

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

AV 4

OPTICAL
AV 5

COAXIAL

AV 1

AV 2

COAXIAL

AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack or
AV 2 (COAXIAL) jack

Audio output
(digital optical or digital coaxial)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–2, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL

( TV )

AV 3

Video device

OPTICAL

HDMI

Y
VIDEO

AV 2

COAXIAL

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

AM

COAXIAL

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

Video device
• To watch videos input to the AV 1–2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks of the unit (p.22).

If you select the input source by pressing HDMI 1–4, the video/audio played back on
the video device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the HDMI 1–4 jacks, you need to connect your TV to the HDMI OUT jack of the
unit (p.18 to 21).

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

En

23

1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10

■ Composite video connection

■ Changing the combination of video/audio input jacks

Connect a video device to the unit with a video pin cable and an audio cable (digital
coaxial, digital optical, or stereo pin cable). Choose a set of input jacks (on the unit)
depending on the audio output jacks available on your video device.

If the combination of video/audio input jacks available on the unit does not match your
video device, change its combination according to the output jacks of your device. You
can connect a video device that has the following video/audio output jacks.

Output jacks on video device

Output jacks on video device

Input jacks on the unit

Input jacks on the unit
Video

Audio

Composite video

Video

Digital coaxial

AV 3 (VIDEO + COAXIAL)

Digital optical

AV 4 (VIDEO + OPTICAL)

Analog stereo

AV 5–6 (VIDEO + AUDIO)

HDMI

Audio

Video

Audio

Digital optical

HDMI 1–4

AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

HDMI 1–4

AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

HDMI 1–4

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO

Analog stereo

AV 1–2
(COMPONENT
VIDEO)

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO

Video output
(composite video)
Component video

AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jack

VIDEO
V

HDMI OUT

❑ Necessary setting

HDMI 2

HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)

ARC

V

VIDEO

For example, if you have connected a video device to AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) and
AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks of the unit, change the combination setting as follows.

ANTENNA
AM

FM

PR

PB

Video device

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Video output
(component video)

VIDEO

C

C

COAXIAL
OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

COAXIAL

AV 2 (COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks

COMPONENT
VIDEO

AV
OUT

O

O

OPTICAL

OPTICAL

L

PR

L

L

The unit (rear)

The unit (rear)
PR

L
HDMI OUT

R

PR

R

R

PB

HDMI 2

HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)

Y

ARC

PB

PB

R
ANTENNA
AM

Y

FM

Y

PR

Audio output
Any of AV 3 (COAXIAL) jack,
(either digital optical,
AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)
AV 5–6 (AUDIO) jacks

PB

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

L

VIDEO

AUDIO
L

If you select the input source by pressing AV 3–6, the video/audio played back on the
video device will be output from the unit.

OPTICAL

AV 1

COAXIAL

AV 2

COAXIAL

OPTICAL
( TV )

AV 3

AV 4

AV 5

AV 6

L

L

R
AV
OUT

R

R

Video device

R
AV 5

• To watch videos input to the AV 3–6 (VIDEO) jacks, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).

AV 5 (AUDIO) jacks

Audio output
(analog stereo)

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

En

24

1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 6 7 8 9 10

1
2

After connecting external devices (such as a TV and playback
devices) and power cable of the unit, turn on the unit.
Press AV 2 to select “AV 2” (video input jack to be used) as the input
source.

Connecting audio devices (such as CD players)
Connect audio devices such as CD players and MD players to the unit. Depending on
the audio output jacks available on your audio device, choose one of the following
connections.
Audio output jacks on audio device

Audio output jacks on the unit

Digital optical

AV 1 (OPTICAL)
AV 4 (OPTICAL)

Digital coaxial

AV 2–3 (COAXIAL)

Analog stereo

AV 5–6 (AUDIO)
AUDIO

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

AV

OPTION

SETUP

TOP

OPTION

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

AV 2

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER

The unit (rear)

POP UP
HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

(BD/DVD)

ARC

3
4

O

Press OPTION.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Audio In” and press ENTER.

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR

PB

PB

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Y
VIDEO

AudioIn
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select “AV 5” (audio input jack to be
used).
VOL.

AudioAV5

6

OPTICAL

OPTICAL

C

C

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

MONITOR O

L

VOL.

5

O

ANTENNA
AM

PR

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

SUB

L

L

L

R

R

R

Audio device

R

AUDIO

AV 1–6 jacks
AUDIO jacks

Audio output
(either digital optical,
digital coaxial, or analog stereo)

If you select the input source by pressing AV 1–6 or AUDIO, the audio played back on
the audio device will be output from the unit.

Press OPTION.

This completes the necessary settings.
If you select “AV 2” as the input source by pressing AV 2, the video/audio played back
on the video device will be output from the unit.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting playback devices

En

25

1 2 3 4 Playback device connections 5 FM/AM antenna connections 6 7 8 9 10

Connecting to the jacks on the front panel
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to temporarily connect devices such as
camcorders and portable audio players to the unit.
Before making a connection, stop playback on the device and turn down the volume on
the unit.

5 Connecting the FM/AM antennas
Connect the supplied FM/AM antennas to the unit.
Fix the end of the FM antenna to a wall, and place the AM antenna on a flat surface.
FM antenna
AM antenna

SCENE

BD
DVD

INPUT

TONE CONTROL

TV

NET

PROGRAM

RADIO

STRAIGHT

VIDEO AUX

USB

The unit (rear)
AUDIO

VIDEO

iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A

HDMI OUT

The unit (front)

V

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

NETWORK

ARC

ANTENNA
AM

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PB

PB

SPEAKERS
FRONT

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BA
/ZONE

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

Portable audio player

Assembling and connecting the AM antenna

Camcorder

If you select “V-AUX” as the input source by pressing V-AUX, the video/audio played
back on the device will be output from the unit.

• To watch videos input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack, you need to connect your TV to the MONITOR OUT
(VIDEO) jack of the unit (p.22).
• You need to prepare the video/audio cables that match the output jacks on your device.

Hold down

Insert

Release

• For details on how to connect an iPod or a USB storage device, see “Connecting an iPod” (p.46) or
“Connecting a USB storage device” (p.50).
• When “USB” is selected as the input source, video signals input to the VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack are output
from the MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) jack.

• Unwind only the length of cable needed from the AM antenna unit.
• The wires of the AM antenna have no polarity.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting the FM/AM antennas

En

26

1 2 3 4 5 6 Network connections 7 8 9 10

6 Connecting to a network
Connect the unit to your router with a commercially-available STP network cable (CAT-5
or higher straight cable).
You can enjoy Internet radio or music files stored on media servers, such as PCs and
Network Attached Storage (NAS), on the unit.

• Some security software installed on your PC or the firewall settings of network devices (such as a router)
may block the access of the unit to the network devices or the Internet. In these cases, configure the
security software or firewall settings appropriately.
• Each server must be connected to the same subnet as the unit.

Network Attached Storage
(NAS)

Internet

• To use the service via the Internet, broadband connection is strongly recommended.

WAN

PC
LAN

Modem

Router

Network cable

HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

NETWORK

ARC

ANTENNA
AM

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PB

PB
FRONT

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

The unit (rear)

• If you are using a router that supports DHCP, you do not need to configure any network settings for the unit,
as the network parameters (such as the IP address) will be assigned automatically to it. You only need to
configure the network settings if your router does not support DHCP or if you want to configure the network
parameters manually (p.77).
• You can check whether the network parameters (such as IP address) are properly assigned to the unit in
“Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

PREPARATIONS ➤ Connecting to a network

En

27

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Recording device connections 8 Power cable connection 9 10

7 Connecting recording devices
You can connect video/audio recording devices to the AV OUT jacks. These jacks
output analog video/audio signals selected as the input.

8 Connecting the power cable
Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Set the switch position of VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110–120/220–240 V, 50/60 Hz.

• To copy video/audio from a video device, connect the video device to the AV 5–6 jacks or VIDEO AUX
(VIDEO/AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• To copy audio from an audio device, connect the audio device to the AV 5–6 jacks, AUDIO jacks, or VIDEO
AUX (AUDIO) jacks of the unit.
• Be sure to use the AV OUT jacks only for connecting recording devices.

• Make sure you set VOLTAGE SELECTOR of the unit BEFORE plugging the power cable into an AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to the unit and create a
potential fire hazard.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

Video/audio input
AV OUT jacks

The unit (rear)
V

HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

V

L

220V240V

L
R

ANTENNA
FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

R

PR

PB

AV
OUT

110V 120V

L

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

ARC

AM

VOLTAGE
SELECTOR

VIDEO

The unit (rear)

R

SPEAKERS

Video recording
device

ENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

AUDIO

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

After all the connections are complete, plug in the power cable.
The unit (rear)
To an AC wall outlet

NETWORK

SPEAKERS
FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

PREPARATIONS

➤ Connecting recording devices

En

28

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Language setting 10

9 Selecting an on-screen menu language

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

Select the desired on-screen menu language from English
(default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

AV

1

1
2

ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM
PRESET

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

6

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

SETUP

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER

3
4

Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select “Language” and press
ENTER.

MUTE

MODE

Setup
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

Speaker

English

HDMI

Français

Sound

Deutsch

ECO

Español

Function

Русский

Network

中文

Language

TV CH

MUTE

5

Use the cursor keys to select the desired language.

Setup
Speaker

English

HDMI

Français

Sound

Deutsch

ECO

Español

Function

Русский

Network

中文

Language

PREPARATIONS ➤ Selecting an on-screen menu language

En

29

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup

10 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

RECEIVER z

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

1

B

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function
detects speaker connections, measures the distances from them to
your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the
speaker settings, such as volume balance and acoustic
parameters, to suit your room.

4

Place the YPAO microphone at your listening
position (same height as your ears) and connect it
to the YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The unit (front)

ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

– Use YPAO after connecting a TV and speakers to the unit.
– During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function
at night when it may be a nuisance to others.

1

RADIO

– During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

OPTION

SETUP

• Please note the following when using YPAO.

2

– During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

1

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

– Do not connect headphones.

1
2

Press RECEIVER z to turn on the unit.
Turn on the TV and switch the TV input to display
video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

YPAO microphone
Listening
5
position

4

8

ENT

Ear height

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to
the unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

TV

MUTE

3

4

INPUT
TV VOL

9

TV CH

3

Turn on the subwoofer and set the volume to half. If
the crossover frequency is adjustable, set it to
maximum.
VOLUME

MIN

MAX

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

MIN

9

Place the YPAO microphone at
your listening position (same height
as your ears). We recommend the
use of a tripod as a microphone
stand. You can use the tripod
screws to stabilize the microphone.

The following screen appears on the TV.

MAX

Auto Setup
Start
Exit

• (RX-V573 only)
If you are using bi-amp connection or Zone B speakers, set “Power Amp
Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to the appropriate setting before starting
YPAO.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Press SETUP key
to Start

Power Amp Assign
Basic

“Power Amp Assign”
setting (p.69)
(RX-V573 only)

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

En

30

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup

CODE SET

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or use the
cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before starting the
measurement.

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

• A speaker with a problem is indicated by blinking of the speaker indicators in
the front display.
• If multiple warnings are given (when operating with the front display), use
the cursor keys (q/w) to check the other warning messages.

AV

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).

ZONE

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

5

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

To save the measurement results, use the cursor
keys (e/r) to select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

To start the measurement, use the cursor keys to
select “Start” and press SETUP.

Auto Setup

ENHANCER

SCENE
TV

NET

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Result

3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

SAVE

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

Exit

The measurement will start in 10 seconds. Press ENTER to
start the measurement immediately.

DIRECT

Measurement
Finished

Start

MUSIC

SLEEP

BD
DVD

6

MUTE

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• To stop the measurement temporarily, press RETURN and follow the
procedure in “Error messages” (p.32).

The following screen appears on the TV when the
measurement finishes.

The adjusted speaker settings are applied.

MODE

• To finish the measurement without saving the result, select “CANCEL”.
Auto Setup
1

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

8

ENT

Start
Exit

Measurement
Finished
Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

4

TV CH

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

MUTE

1

7

2

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.

3

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

Caution

4

• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be placed anywhere
where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or high temperatures (such as on
top of AV equipment).

1 The number of speakers (front side/rear
side/subwoofer)
2 Speaker distance (nearest/farthest)
3 Adjustment range of speaker output level
4 Warning message (if available)

• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such as W-1)
appears, see “Error messages” (p.32) or “Warning messages” (p.33).

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

En

31

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup

Error messages
If any error message is displayed during the measurement, resolve the problem and perform YPAO again.

Auto Setup
Start

ERROR
E-5:Noisy

Error
message

Exit
PROCEED

5%

TV screen

Error message

Cause

Remedy

E-1:No Front SP
(E-1:NO FRNT SP)

Front speakers are not detected.

E-2:No Sur. SP
(E-2:NO SUR SP)

One of the surround speakers cannot be
detected.

E-4:SBR → SBL
(E-4:SBR → SBL)

A surround back speaker is connected to
the R side only.

When using only one surround back speaker, you need to
connect it to the SINGLE jack (L side). Exit YPAO, turn off the
unit, and then reconnect the speaker.

E-5:Noisy
(E-5:NOISY)

The noise is too loud.

Keep the room quiet and retry YPAO. If you select
“PROCEED”, YPAO takes the measurement again and
ignores any noise detected.

E-6:Check Sur.
(E-6:CHECK SUR)

Surround back speakers are connected,
but no surround speakers are connected.

Surround speakers need to be connected in order to use
surround back speakers. Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and
then reconnect the speakers.

E-7:No MIC
(E-7:NO MIC)

The YPAO microphone has been removed.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO.

E-8:No Signal
(E-8:NO SIGNAL)

The YPAO microphone cannot detect test
tones.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the YPAO MIC jack firmly
and retry YPAO. If this error occurs repeatedly, contact the
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

E-9:User Cancel
(E-9:CANCEL)

The measurement has been canceled.

Retry or exit YPAO as necessary.

E-10:Internal Err.
(E-10:INTERNAL)

An internal error has occurred.

Exit YPAO, and turn off and on the unit. If this error occurs
repeatedly, contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then check the speaker
connections.

VOL.

E-5:NOISY

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

Front display

■ Procedure to handle errors

1
2

Check the content of error message and
press ENTER.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To exit the YPAO measurement:
a Select “EXIT” and press ENTER.
b Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Exit” and press
ENTER.

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

c Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the unit.

To retry the YPAO measurement from
beginning:
Select “RETRY” and press ENTER.

To proceed with the current YPAO
measurement (for E-5 and E-9 only):
Select “PROCEED” and press ENTER.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

En

32

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Automatic speaker setup

Warning messages
If a warning message is displayed after the measurement, you can still save the measurement results by following on-screen instructions.
However, we recommend you perform YPAO again in order to use the unit with the optimal speaker settings.

Auto Setup

Warning message

Cause

W-1:Out of Phase
(W-1:PHASE)

Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem speaker. If
the speaker is connected incorrectly, exit YPAO, turn off the
A speaker cable may be connected with the unit, and then reconnect the speaker cable.
reverse polarity (+/-).
Depending on the type of speakers or room environment, this
message may appear even if the speakers are connected
correctly.

W-2:Over Distance
(W-2:DISTANCE)

A speaker is placed more than 24 m (80 ft)
from the listening position.

Exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and place the problem speaker
within 24 m (80 ft) of the listening position.

There are significant volume differences
between the speakers.

Check the usage environment and cable connections (+/-) of
each speaker, and the volume of the subwoofer. If there is
any problem, exit YPAO, turn off the unit, and then reconnect
speaker cable or correct the speaker positions. We
recommend using the same speakers or speakers with
specifications that are as similar as possible.

Measurement
Finished

Start

Result

Exit

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch
3.0 / 10.5 m
-3.0 / +10.0 dB

Warning
message

W-1:Out of Phase

Remedy

TV screen
Problem speaker (blinks)

W-3:Level Error
(W-3:LEVEL)

VOL.

W-1:PHASE

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

Front display

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

■ Procedure to handle warnings

1

Check the content of warning message
and press ENTER.

2

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select the
desired operation.
To save the measurement results:
Select “SAVE” and press ENTER.

To discard the measurement result:
Select “CANCEL” and press ENTER.

3

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.

PREPARATIONS ➤

Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

En

33

PLAYBACK

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

Input selection keys

AV

B
ZONE

Basic playback procedure

1

Turn on the external devices (such as a TV or
BD/DVD player) connected to the unit.

2

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

TUNER

FM

AM
PRESET

INFO

TUNING

INFO

MEMORY
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER

DIRECT

3

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

RETURN

VOLUME

For details on the following operations, see the
corresponding pages.

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MUTE

Press INFO.
Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.
VOL.

AudioDecoder

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

R
SR

VOL.

ProLogic

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

Information

• Playing back music stored on a USB storage device
(p.50)

4

8

• Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)
(p.53)

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

SW
C

Item name

• Playing back iPod music (p.46)
2

L
SL

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.

• Listening to FM/AM radio (p.42)

MODE

1

1

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.
Refer to the instruction manual for the external device.

VOLUME

ENTER

Switching information on the front display

TV CH

• Listening to Internet radio (p.56)

MUTE

• Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
(p.58)

4

• Available items vary depending on the selected input source. The displayed
item can also be applied separately to each input source group.

Input source group

Item

HDMI 1–4
AV 1–6
AUDIO
V-AUX

Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound
mode name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

• To mute the audio output, press MUTE. Press MUTE again to unmute.

USB
SERVER
AirPlay

• To adjust the treble/bass settings, use the “Option” menu or TONE
CONTROL on the front panel (p.63).

NET RADIO

Song (song title), Artist (artist name), Album (album
name), DSP Program (sound mode name), Audio
Decoder (decoder name)
* During simple playback of iPod:
Input (input source name), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

Song (song title), Album (album name), Station
(station name), DSP Program (sound mode name),
Audio Decoder (decoder name)
Frequency (frequency), DSP Program (sound mode
name), Audio Decoder (decoder name)

TUNER

* (U.K. and Europe models only)
Radio Data System data is also available when the unit is
tuned into a Radio Data System broadcasting station (p.45).

PLAYBACK ➤ Basic playback procedure

En

34

Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

SOURCE/RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

Input selection keys

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

The SCENE function allows you to select the assigned input source,
sound program, Compressed Music Enhancer on/off, and target
zones (RX-V573 only) with just one touch.

1

ZONE

TUNER

FM

INFO

1

The input source and settings registered to the
corresponding scene are selected. The unit turns on
automatically when it is in standby mode.

AM
PRESET

Press SCENE.

Configuring scene assignments

TUNING

MEMORY

• Select an input source (p.34)
• Select a sound program (p.36)
• Enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41)

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER

By default, the following settings are registered for each scene.

DIRECT

• (RX-V573 only)
Enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B (p.61)

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

SCENE

OPTION

SETUP

Input

Sound
program

Compressed Target zone
SCENE
Music
link
(RX-V573 only)
Enhancer
playback
Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled

On

On

Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled

On

On

Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled

Off

On

Zone A:
enabled
Zone B:
disabled

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

SCENE

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

BD/DVD

HDMI 1

MOVIE
(Sci-Fi)

Off

MUTE

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

TV

AV 4

STRAIGHT

NET

NET
RADIO

MUSIC
(7ch/5ch
Stereo*)

RADIO

MUSIC
TUNER (7ch/5ch
Stereo*)

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

Perform the following operations to prepare the
settings you want to assign to a scene.

2

Hold down the desired SCENE key until “SET
Complete” appears on the front display.
VOL.

SETComplete

3

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

If you want to control the corresponding playback
device after selecting the scene, hold down the
corresponding SCENE key and input selection key
together for more than 3 seconds.

Once the setting is completed successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER
blinks twice.
Off
• If you have not registered the remote control code of the playback device yet, see
“Registering the remote control codes for playback devices” (p.83) to register it.

* RX-V573: 7ch Stereo, RX-V473: 5ch Stereo

• The SCENE link playback function allows you to automatically turn on the TV or
start playback of an external device connected to the unit via HDMI, in conjunction
with a scene selection. To enable SCENE link playback, set “SCENE” (p.73) in the
“Setup” menu to “On”.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the input source and favorite settings with one touch (SCENE)

En

35

Selecting the sound mode

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs and
surround decoders that allow you to enjoy playback sources with
your favorite sound mode (such as sound field effect or stereo
playback).

HDMI

1

2

3

4

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

Selecting a sound program suitable for movies (p.37)

ZONE

TUNER

FM

Press MOVIE repeatedly.

AM
PRESET

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

POP-UP
MENU

Press MUSIC repeatedly.
Selecting a surround decoder (p.40)

Switching to the straight decode mode (p.39)
Press STRAIGHT.

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

Selecting a sound program suitable for music or stereo
playback (p.38)

Press SUR.DECODE repeatedly.
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

MOVIE
MUSIC
SUR.DECODE
STRAIGHT
DIRECT
ENHANCER

MUTE

MODE

Switching to the direct playback mode (p.40)
Press DIRECT.

1

2

3

4

Enable Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41)

5

6

7

8

Press ENHANCER.

9

0

10

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

• You can also switch the sound programs and surround decoder by pressing
PROGRAM on the front panel.
• The sound mode can be applied separately to each input source.
• When you play back audio signals with a sampling rate of higher than 96 kHz or
playing back DTS Express, the straight decode mode (p.39) is automatically
selected.
• You can check which speakers are currently outputting sound by looking at the
speaker indicators on the unit’s front panel (p.8).

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

En

36

Enjoying sound field effects (CINEMA DSP)

The unit is equipped with a variety of sound programs that utilize Yamaha’s original DSP
technology (CINEMA DSP). It allows you to easily create sound fields like actual movie
theaters or concert halls in your room.

Drama

This program features stable reverberations that match a wide range of
movie genres, from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest, but suitably stereophonic. The sound effects
and background music are reproduced with a gentle echo that does not
impinge on the articulation of the dialogue. You’ll never get tired listening for
long periods.

Mono Movie

This program reproduces monaural video sources, such as classic movies,
in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program creates a
pleasant space with depth, by adding breadth and the appropriate
reverberation to the original audio.

Sports

This program allows listeners to enjoy the rich vividness of sport broadcasts
and light entertainment programs. In sports broadcasts, the commentators’
voices are positioned clearly at the center, while the atmosphere inside the
stadium is realistically conveyed by the peripheral delivery of the sounds of
the fans in a suitable space.

Action Game

This program is suitable for action games, such as car racing and fighting
games. The reality of, and emphasis on, various effects makes the player
feel like they are right in the middle of the action, allowing for greater
concentration. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a more dynamic and strong sound field.

Roleplaying Game

This program is suitable for role-playing and adventure games. This
program adds depth to the sound field for natural and realistic reproduction
of background music, special effects, and dialogue from a wide variety of
scenes. Use this program in combination with Compressed Music
Enhancer for a clearer and more spatial sound field.

Sound program category
“CINEMA DSP” lights up
VOL.

Sci-Fi

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

Sound program

• When you play back DTS-HD sources, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.

• You can adjust the sound field effect level in “DSP Level” (p.63) in the “Option” menu.

■ Sound programs suitable for movies (MOVIE)
The following sound programs are optimized for viewing video sources, such as
movies, TV programs, and games.

Standard

This program creates a sound field that emphasizes the surround feeling
without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multichannel audio,
such as Dolby Digital and DTS. Its design is based on the concept of the
ideal movie theater, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful
reverberations from the left, right, and rear.

Spectacle

This program delivers the scale and grandeur of spectacular movie
productions. It delivers an expansive sound space to match the
cinemascope wide-screen, and boasts a broad dynamic range, providing
everything from small delicate sounds to powerful loud booms.

Sci-Fi

This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the
latest Sci-Fi and SFX movies. You can enjoy a variety of
cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialogue, sound effects, and background music.

Adventure

This program is ideal for reproducing the sound design of action and
adventure movies precisely. The sound field restrains reverberations, but
puts emphasis on reproducing a sensation of expansiveness on both sides,
powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The restrained depth
creates a clear and powerful space, while also maintaining the articulation
of the sounds and the separation of the channels.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

En

37

■ Sound programs suitable for music/stereo playback
(MUSIC)
The following sound programs are optimized for listening to music sources.
You can also select stereo playback.

Hall in Munich

This program simulates a Munich concert hall with approximately 2,500
seats that uses stylish wood for the interior finishing. Fine, beautiful
reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.

Hall in Vienna

This program simulates a 1700-seat, middle-sized concert hall with a
shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings
create extremely complex reverberations from all around the audience,
producing a very full, rich sound.

Chamber

This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling, like an
audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable
for courtly music and chamber music.

Cellar Club

This program simulates an intimate concert venue with a low ceiling and
homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field delivers powerful sounds
that make you feel as if you are sitting in the front row in front of a small
stage.

The Roxy Theatre

This program creates the sound field of a 460-seat rock music concert
venue in Los Angeles. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the
hall.

The Bottom Line

This program creates the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a
famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left
and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.

Music Video

This program allows you to enjoy videos of pop, rock, and jazz concerts, as
if you were there yourself. Immerse yourself in the hot concert atmosphere
thanks to the vividness of the singers and solos on stage, a presence
sound field that emphasizes the beat of rhythm instruments, and a surround
sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.

2ch Stereo

Use this program to mix down multichannel sources to 2 channels. When
multichannel signals are input, they are down mixed to 2 channels and
output from the front speakers (this program does not utilize CINEMA DSP).

7ch Stereo
5ch Stereo

(RX-V573: 7ch Stereo, RX-V473: 5ch Stereo)
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back
multichannel sources, the unit mixes down the source to 2 channels, and
then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

En

38

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

■ Enjoying stereoscopic sound fields
(CINEMA DSP 3D)

Enjoying unprocessed playback

CINEMA DSP 3D creates a natural stereoscopic sound field in your
room.

■ Playing back in original channels
(straight decode)

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

You can play back input sources without any sound field effect
processing.

AV

CINEMA DSP 3D functions when both of the following conditions
are met.

ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM
PRESET

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

STRAIGHT
ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

• “CINEMA DSP 3D Mode” (p.73) in the “Setup” menu is set to
“On”.

1

VOL.
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10
TV

TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

L
SL

SW
C

VOL.
R
SR

MUTE

MODE

INPUT

3

Hall in Vienna

DISPLAY

ENT

Press STRAIGHT.
Each time you press the key, the straight decode mode is
enabled or disabled.

“CINEMA DSP n” lights up

OPTION

SETUP

• One of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch
Stereo) is selected (p.37).

When the straight decode mode is enabled, the unit produces
stereo sound from the front speakers for 2-channel sources such as
CDs, and produces unprocessed multichannel sounds for
multichannel sources.

■ Enjoying sound field effects without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP)
If you select one of the sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and
7ch/5ch Stereo) when no surround speakers are connected, the
unit automatically creates the surround sound field using the
front-side speakers.

STRAIGHT

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

• (RX-V573 only)
To enable 6.1/7.1-channel playback from 5.1-channel sources when surround
back speakers are used, set “Extended Surround” (p.63) in the “Option” menu to a
setting other than “Off”.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

En

39

■ Playing back 2-channel sources in
multichannel (surround decoder)

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

The surround decoder enables unprocessed multichannel
playback from 2-channel sources. When a multichannel source is
input, it works the same way as the straight decode mode.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

For details on each decoder see “Glossary” (p.93).

B

1

ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM
PRESET

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

SUR.DECODE
ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

Press SUR.DECODE to select a surround decoder.
Each time you press the key, the surround decoder
changes.

TUNING

TV

NET

RADIO

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

ProLogic
bPro Logic

bPLIIx Movie*

bPLIIx Music*
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

ENT

Press DIRECT.
Each time you press the key, the direct playback mode is
enabled or disabled.
VOL.

bPLII Music

1

1

VOL.

bPLII Movie

MODE

When the direct playback mode is enabled, the unit plays back the
selected source with the least circuitry in order to reduce the
electrical noise from other circuitry (such as the front display). It
allows you to enjoy Hi-Fi sound quality.

DIRECT
L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

OPTION

SETUP

Enjoying pure high fidelity sound
(direct playback)

bPLII Game

DIRECT

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

Uses the Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all
sources.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for movies.
Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for music.

• When the direct playback mode is enabled, the following functions are not
available.
– Selecting sound programs
– Adjusting the tone control
– Operating the on-screen menu
– Viewing information on the front display (when not in operation)

bPLIIx Game*

Use the Dolby Pro Logic II decoder (or Dolby Pro
Logic IIx decoder) suitable for games.

Neo: 6 Cinema

Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for movies.

Neo: 6 Music

Uses the DTS Neo: 6 decoder suitable for music.

TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

* RX-V573 only

(RX-V573 only)
• You cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoders when headphones are
connected or when “Surround Back” in the “Setup” menu is set to “None”.

• You can adjust the surround decoder parameters in “DSP Parameter” (p.73)
in the “Setup” menu.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

En

40

Enjoying compressed music with enhanced
sound (Compressed Music Enhancer)

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

1

2

3

3

4

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

Compressed Music Enhancer adds depth and breadth to the
sound, allowing you to enjoy a dynamic sound close to the original
sound before it was compressed. This function can be used along
with any other sound modes.

B
ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

ENHANCER

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

1

Press ENHANCER.
Each time you press the key, Compressed Music Enhancer
is enabled or disabled.

OPTION

SETUP

“ENHANCER” lights up
VOLUME

ENTER

ENHANCER
RETURN

VOL.

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

Enhancer On

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

ENT

• Compressed Music Enhancer does not work on the following audio sources.
– Signals whose sampling rate is over 48 kHz
– High-definition streaming audio

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

• You can also use “Enhancer” (p.64) in the “Option” menu to enable/disable
Compressed Music Enhancer.

Enjoying surround sound with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)

You can enjoy surround or sound field effects, like a multichannel
speaker system, with stereo headphones by connecting the
headphones to the PHONES jack and selecting a sound program
or a surround decoder.

PLAYBACK ➤ Selecting the sound mode

En

41

Listening to FM/AM radio

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can tune into a radio station by specifying its frequency or
selecting from registered radio stations.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

AV

1

TUNER

ZONE

FM
AM

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

TUNING

TUNING

• The radio frequencies differ depending on the country or region where the unit is
being used. The explanation of this section uses a display with frequencies used
in U.K. and Europe models.
• If you cannot obtain good reception on the radio, adjust the direction of the FM/AM
antennas.

Selecting a frequency for reception

1

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

2

Press FM or AM to select a band.
VOL.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

Setting the frequency steps

DIRECT

SLEEP

FM87.50MHz

SW
C
R
L
SL
SR
SBL
SBR

SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

(Asia and General models only)

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

At the factory, the frequency step setting is set to 50 kHz for FM and
9 kHz for AM. Depending on your country or region, set the
frequency steps to 100 kHz for FM and 10 kHz for AM.

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

1
2

Numeric keys

Set the unit to standby mode.
When holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel,
press z (power).
z (power)

ENT

Use the following keys to set a frequency.
TUNING: Increase/decrease the frequency. Hold down the
key for about a second to search stations automatically.
Numeric keys: Enter a frequency directly. For example, to
select 98.50 MHz, press “9”, “8”, “5” and “0” (or ENT).
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

FM98.50MHz

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

“TUNED” lights up when a signal is received from a radio
station.

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

3

TV CH

MUTE

“STEREO” also lights up when a stereo signal is received.
PROGRAM

3

STRAIGHT

• “Wrong Station!” appears when you enter a frequency that is out of
reception range.

Press PROGRAM repeatedly to select “TU”.

TUFM50/AM9

• You can switch between “Stereo” (stereo) and “Mono” (monaural) for FM
radio reception by pressing MODE. When the signal reception for an FM
radio station is unstable, switching to monaural may improve it.
• You can watch videos input from external devices while listening to radio by
selecting the video input jack in “Video Out” (p.65) in the “Option” menu.

4
5

Press STRAIGHT to select “FM100/AM10”.
Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode
and turn it on again.
PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

En

42

Registering favorite radio stations (presets)

CODE SET

• To specify the preset number from which to start the registration, press
PRESET or cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset number within 5 seconds
after step 4 (while “READY” is displayed) and then press ENTER (or just
wait for 5 seconds).

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can register up to 40 radio stations as presets. Once you have
registered stations, you can easily tune into them by selecting their
preset numbers.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

B
ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

• To cancel the Auto Preset process, press RETURN.

TUNING

TUNER
MEMORY
PRESET

■ Registering radio stations automatically
(Auto Preset)

When the Auto Preset process finishes, “FINISH” appears and the
“Option” menu closes automatically.
VOL.

Automatically register FM radio stations with strong signals (up to
40 stations).

AutoPreset

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP

• To register AM radio stations, follow “Registering a radio station manually”.

SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

OPTION

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

1

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

2
3

Press OPTION.

MUTE

MODE

1

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• (U.K. and Europe models only)
Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically by the
Auto Preset function.

4

8

Use the cursor keys to select “Auto Preset”.

ENT

VOL.

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

AutoPreset

TV CH

MUTE

■ Registering a radio station manually
Select a radio station manually and register it to a preset number.

1

Follow “Selecting a frequency for reception” (p.42)
to tune into the desired radio station.

2

Hold down MEMORY for more than 2 seconds.
The first time that you do register a station, the selected
radio station will be registered to the preset number “01”.
Thereafter, each radio station you select will be registered
to the next empty (unused) preset number after the most
recently registered number.
VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

4

To start the Auto Preset process, press ENTER.
The registration will start in 5 seconds. Press ENTER again
to start the registration immediately.
“SEARCH” appears during Auto Preset
VOL.

01:FM98.50MHz

SW
C

R
SR

Preset number

• To select a preset number for registering, press MEMORY once after tuning
into the desired radio station, press PRESET to select a preset number, and
then press MEMORY again.

01:FM87.50MHz
Preset number from which to start the registration

L
SL

VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

02:Empty

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

“Empty” (not in use) or the frequency currently registered

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

En

43

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

B
ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

TUNING

TUNER
PRESET

■ Selecting a preset station

■ Clearing preset stations

Tune into a registered radio station by selecting its preset number.

Clear radio stations registered to the preset numbers.

1

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

1

Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.

2

Press PRESET repeatedly to select the desired radio
station.

2
3

Press OPTION.

You can also enter a preset number (01 to 40) directly by
using the numeric keys after pressing PRESET once.

Use the cursor keys to select “Clear Preset” and
press ENTER.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

PRESET

DIRECT

SLEEP

01:FM98.50MHz

SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

L
SL

SW
C

ClearPreset

R
SR

OPTION

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

VOL.

VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

DISPLAY

Cursor keys
ENTER

• “No Presets” appears when no radio stations are registered.

4

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a preset station
to be cleared and press ENTER.

• “Wrong Num.” appears when an invalid number is entered.
TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

• “Empty” appears when a preset number not in use is entered.

MUTE

VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

01:FM98.50MHz

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

Preset station to be cleared
Numeric keys

If the preset station is cleared, “Cleared” appears and then
the next in-use preset number is displayed.

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

VOL.

MUTE

01:Cleared

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

5

Repeat step 4 until all desired preset stations are
cleared.

6

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

En

44

Radio Data System tuning

CODE SET

• “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, and “Clock Time” are not
displayed if the radio station does not provide the Radio Data System
service.

SOURCE RECEIVER

(U.K. and Europe models only)

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM
stations in many countries. The unit can receive various types of
Radio Data System data, such as “Program Service”, “Program
Type,” “Radio Text” and “Clock Time”, when it is tuned into a Radio
Data System broadcasting station.

AV

ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM
PRESET

INFO

TUNING

INFO

MEMORY
SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

MOVIE

MUSIC
ENHANCER

DIRECT

1

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.

OPTION

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

■ Displaying the Radio Data System
information

MUTE

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

• We recommend using “Auto Preset” to tune into the Radio Data System
broadcasting stations (p.43).

2

Press INFO.

INFO

1

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

2

Use the cursor keys to select “Traffic Program”
(TrafficProgram) and press ENTER.
The traffic information station search will start in 5 seconds.
Press ENTER again to start the search immediately.

• To search upward/downward from the current frequency, press the cursor
keys (q/w) while “READY” is displayed.

VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

ProgramType

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

ENT

• To cancel the search, press RETURN.
• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

TV

MUTE

When “TUNER” is selected as the input source, the unit
automatically receives traffic information. To enable this function,
follow the procedure below to set the traffic information station.

Each time you press the key, the displayed item changes.

Item name

INPUT
TV VOL

■ Receiving traffic information
automatically

TV CH

About 3 seconds later, the corresponding information for
the displayed item appears.

9850

VOL.

CLASSICS

SW
C

FINISH

VOL.
STEREO
TUNED

TPFM101.30MHz

STEREO
TUNED
L
SL

The following screen appears for about 3 seconds when the
search finishes.

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

R
SR

Traffic information station (frequency)
Information
Program Service Program service name
Program Type

Current program type

Radio Text

Information on the current program

Clock Time

Current time

DSP Program

Sound mode name

Audio Decoder

Decoder name

Frequency

Frequency

• “TP Not Found” appears for about 3 seconds when no traffic information
stations are found.

PLAYBACK ➤ Listening to FM/AM radio

En

45

Playing back iPod music
You can play back iPod music on the unit using a USB cable
supplied with the iPod.

Connecting an iPod
Connect your iPod to the unit with the USB cable supplied with the
iPod.

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or software
version of the iPod.
• To play back iPod videos on the unit, an Apple Composite AV Cable (not supplied)
is required. Connect the USB and composite video plugs of the Apple Composite
AV cable to the USB jack and VIDEO AUX (VIDEO) jack of the unit, and connect
your TV and the unit with a video pin cable (p.22). To select a video, operate the
iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48).

1

Connect the USB cable to the iPod.

2

Connect the USB cable to the USB jack.

Supported iPods (as of December 2011)
• iPod touch, iPod nano (2nd gen. to 6th gen.)
• iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone
• iPad2, iPad

The unit (front)
RADIO

VIDEO AUX

STRAIGHT

AUDIO

USB

VIDEO

USB

iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A

VOL.

Connected

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

• The iPod charges while it is connected to the unit. If you set the unit to standby
mode while the iPod is charging, the iPod continues to charge up to 4 hours.
If “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu is set to “On”, it continues to
change until full.

• Disconnect the iPod from the USB jack when it is not in use.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

En

46

Playback of iPod content

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

Follow the procedure below to operate the iPod contents and start
playback.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

You can control the iPod with the menu displayed on the TV screen.
USB

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display, or directly
operate the iPod itself in the simple play mode (p.48).

ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

TUNING

1

MUSIC
ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP

TV

NET

■ Browse screen
1

4
iPod
Music

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.

2

RADIO

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers

5

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

3

iPod
Music

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers

DISPLAY

2 Contents list
Displays the list of iPod content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.

1/6
2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

4

3 Item number/total

8

4 Status indicators

ENT

TV

• If playback is ongoing on your iPod, the playback screen is displayed.

INPUT
TV VOL

1/6
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

1 List name

MODE

1

• To operate the iPod manually to select content or control playback, switch to the
simple play mode (p.48).

The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

SCENE
BD
DVD

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.

• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

TV CH

MUTE

2

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

5 Operation menu
Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Icon

Function
Moves 10 pages backward.

iPod
Now Playing

Moves to the previous page of the list.

Artist Name

Moves to the next page of the list.

Album Name
Song Title
2:30

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

5:10

Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

En

47

■ Playback screen

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

1

HDMI

1

2

1

2

3

4

3

4

1

iPod
Now Playing

AV

■ Operating the iPod itself or remote control
(simple play)

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

Album Name

2

Song Title
2:30

ZONE

5:10

To display the TV menu screen, press MODE again.

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

[DISPLAY] to List Browse
PRESET

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

1 Status indicators

MUSIC
ENHANCER

DIRECT

Display the current shuffle/repeat settings (p.49) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

2 Playback information
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY
D

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

TV VOL
MUTE

Operational remote control
keys

Function

4

Cursor keys

Select an item.

ENTER

Confirms the selection.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.

RETURN

Returns to the previous screen.
a

Function

External device
operation keys

a

Resumes playback from pause.

MODE

s

Stops playback.

d

Stops playback temporarily.

8

ENT

f

TV
INPUT

Operate your iPod itself or the remote control to
start playback.

Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.

External device
operation keys

MUTE

MODE

1

2

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

Press MODE to switch to the simple play mode.
The TV menu screen turns off and iPod operations are
enabled.

Artist Name

TV CH

g

Skips forward/backward.

External device
operation keys

d

Starts playback or stops playback
temporarily.

s

Stops playback.

f
g
h
j

Skips forward/backward.

Searches forward/backward (while holding
down).

h
j

Searches forward/backward (by holding down).

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

En

48

■ Repeat/shuffle settings

CODE SET

You can configure the shuffle/repeat settings of your iPod.

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

1

2

3

3

4

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

• During simple play, configure the shuffle/repeat settings directly on your iPod or
press MODE to display the TV menu screen and then follow the procedure below.

B
ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

2

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

1

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

OPTION

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

MUTE

Item

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

Songs (Songs)

Plays back songs in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.

Albums
(Albums)

Plays back albums in random order. “x”
appears in the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears in the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs repeatedly. “v”
appears in the TV screen.

MODE

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

Repeat
(Repeat)

4

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iPod music

En

49

Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can play back music files stored on a USB storage device on
the unit. Refer to the instruction manuals for the USB storage
device for more information.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

USB

• If the USB storage device contains many files, it may take time to load the them. In
this case, “Loading...” appears in the front display.

The unit supports USB mass storage class devices (FAT16 or
FAT32 format).

ZONE

• Disconnect the USB storage device from the USB jack when it is not in use.

TUNER

FM

AM
PRESET

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

• The unit is compatible with sampling rate of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.

RADIO

• Some features may not be compatible, depending on the model or manufacturer
of the USB storage device.

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

• The unit supports WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC
files.

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

Playback of USB storage device contents
Follow the procedure below to operate the USB storage device
contents and start playback.
You can control the USB memory device with the menu displayed
on the TV screen.

Connecting a USB storage device

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

1

Connect the USB storage device to the USB jack.

• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

The unit (front)
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

1

RADIO

10

ENT

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

VIDEO AUX

STRAIGHT

Press USB to select “USB” as the input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

USB

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

AUDIO

VIDEO

iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A

MUTE

USB
Top
Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking

USB

1/12

USB storage device
• If playback is ongoing on your USB storage device, the playback screen is
displayed.

USB

Connected

VOL.

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

En

50

2

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

■ Browse screen

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

1

HDMI

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

4

AV

2
USB
Now Playing

ZONE

TUNER

FM

PRESET
INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking

3

Artist Name

AM

4

USB
Top

5

1/12
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

Album Name
Song Title

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

2:30

1 List name

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

2 Contents list

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

Displays the list of USB storage device contents. Use the cursor keys to
select an item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

3 Item number/total
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.

4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

5 Operation menu
2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10
TV

TV VOL

4

8

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Icon

Function

ENT

Moves 10 pages backward.

INPUT

MUTE

DISPLAY

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

MODE

1

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

TV CH

Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

En

51

■ Playback screen

CODE SET

■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for playback of USB
storage device contents.

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

1

2

3

4

3

4

USB
Now Playing

AV

1

Artist Name
5

6

AUDIO

V-AUX

USB

NET

A

Album Name
Song Title

B

TUNER

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

ENHANCER

1 Status indicators

SCENE
TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

OPTION

VOLUME

ENTER
DISPLAY
D

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MUTE

MODE

External device
operation keys
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

ENT

2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.
Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
External device
operation keys

TV CH

Resumes playback from pause.

s

Stops playback.

d

Stops playback temporarily.

f
g

• Texts in parentheses denote indicators on the front display.

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Item

Function

a

TV
INPUT

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.52) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

DIRECT

SLEEP

TV VOL

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

RETURN

2

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

FM

BD
DVD

When “USB” is selected as the input source, press
OPTION.

2

2:30

ZONE

1

Skips forward/backward.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Repeat
(Repeat)

MUTE

4

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on a USB storage device

En

52

Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

2

3

4

AV

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

Follow the procedure below to operate the PC music contents and
start playback.

ZONE

• To use this function, the unit and your PC must be connected to the same router
(p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address)
are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

TUNING

• The unit supports playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC
and FLAC files.

B

NET

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

Playback of PC music contents

You can play back music files stored on your PC or
DLNA-compatible NAS on the unit.

HDMI

1

RADIO

• The unit is compatible with sampling rates of up to 96 kHz for WAV and FLAC files,
and 48 kHz for other files.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

• To play back FLAC files, you need to install server software that supports sharing
of FLAC files via DLNA on your PC or use a NAS that supports FLAC files.

• “_” (underscore) will be displayed for characters not supported by the unit.

1

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

ENT

Cursor keys
ENTER

You can control the PC/NAS with the menu displayed on the TV
screen.

Media sharing setup

Press NET repeatedly to select “SERVER” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

To play back music files stored on your PC or DLNA-compatible
NAS, first you need to configure the media sharing setting on each
music server.

SERVER
Media Server
DESKTOP
NAS A
NAS B
NOTE

■ For a PC with Windows Media Player
installed

TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

1

Check that Windows Media Player 11 or later is
installed on your PC.

2

In the media sharing settings, enable media sharing
and allow media to be shared with the device.

■ For a PC or a NAS with other DLNA server
software installed

1/4

• If playback of a music file selected from the unit is ongoing on your PC, the
playback screen is displayed.

2

Use the cursor keys to select a music server and
press ENTER.

Refer to the instruction manual for the device or software and
configure the media sharing settings.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

En

53

3

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.

■ Browse screen
1

HDMI

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

If a song is selected, playback starts and the playback
screen is displayed.

4

AV

2
SERVER
Now Playing

ZONE

TUNER

FM

PRESET
INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

Blues
Classical
Electronica
Jazz
Pop
Rock
Soundtrack
Speaking

3

Artist Name

AM

4

SERVER
NAS A

5
1/14

[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

Album Name
Song Title

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

2:30

1 List name

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

2 Contents list

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

Displays the list of PC content. Use the cursor keys to select an item and
press ENTER to confirm the selection.

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

3 Item number/total
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• Files not supported by the unit cannot be selected.

4 Status indicators
Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

TV VOL

4

8

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Icon

Function

ENT

Moves 10 pages backward.

TV
INPUT

MUTE

DISPLAY

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.

5 Operation menu

MODE

1

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

TV CH

Moves to the previous page of the list.
Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

En

54

■ Playback screen

CODE SET

■ Repeat/shuffle settings
You can configure the repeat/shuffle settings for the playback of PC
music content.

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

1

2

3

4

3

4

SERVER
Now Playing

AV

1

Artist Name
5

6

AUDIO

V-AUX

USB

NET

A

Album Name
Song Title

B

TUNER

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

ENHANCER

1 Status indicators

SCENE
TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

OPTION

VOLUME

ENTER
DISPLAY
D

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MUTE

2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
External device
operation keys

External device
operation keys

Function

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

a

Resumes playback from pause.

s

Stops playback.

d

Stops playback temporarily.

ENT

INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

g

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Shuffle
(Shuffle)

Repeat
(Repeat)

f

TV

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

Item

MODE

1

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

Display the current repeat/shuffle settings (p.55) and playback status
(such as play/pause).

DIRECT

SLEEP

MUTE

Use the cursor keys to select “Shuffle” (Shuffle) or
“Repeat” (Repeat) and press ENTER.

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

RETURN

2

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

FM

BD
DVD

When “SERVER” is selected as the input source,
press OPTION.

2

2:30

ZONE

1

Skips forward/backward.

• You can also use a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback. For details, see “DMC Control” (p.78).

4

Setting

Function

Off (Off)

Turns off the shuffle function.

On (On)

Plays back songs in the current album
(folder) in random order. “x” appears on
the TV screen.

Off (Off)

Turns off the repeat function.

One (One)

Plays back the current song repeatedly.
“c” appears on the TV screen.

All (All)

Plays back all songs in the current album
(folder) repeatedly. “v” appears on the
TV screen.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)

En

55

Listening to Internet radio

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

You can listen to Internet radio stations from all over the world.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

You can control the Internet radio with the menu displayed on the
TV screen.

AV

1

B

1

Press NET repeatedly to select “NET RADIO” as the
input source.
The browse screen is displayed on the TV.

NET

ZONE

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the
unit via HDMI. If not, carry out operations while viewing the front display.

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

• You may not be able to receive some Internet radio stations.

SCENE
TV

NET

RADIO

• The unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service.

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help

• This service may be discontinued without notice.

DIRECT

SLEEP

BD
DVD

NET RADIO
Top

• To use this function, the unit must be connected to the Internet (p.27). You can
check whether the network parameters (such as the IP address) are properly
assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

MUTE

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

1/7

2

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press
ENTER.
If an Internet radio station is selected, playback starts and
the playback screen is displayed.

MODE

1

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

4

8

ENT

NET RADIO
Now Playing

TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

Station Name
Album Name
Song Title
2:30

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

• To return to the previous screen, press RETURN.
• To switch between the browse and playback screens during playback, press
DISPLAY.
• You can register your favorite Internet radio stations to the “Bookmarks” folder by
accessing the following website with the web browser on your PC. To use this
feature, you need the vTuner ID of the unit and your e-mail address to create your
personal account. You can check the vTunerID (MAC address of the unit) in
“Information” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.
http://yradio.vtuner.com/

PLAYBACK ➤

Listening to Internet radio

En

56

■ Browse screen

CODE SET

■ Playback screen

SOURCE RECEIVER

1

HDMI

1

2

3

4

3

4

4

NET RADIO
Top

1

2

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

2

ZONE

1

NET RADIO
Now Playing

AV

Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help

5

Station Name

2

Album Name
Song Title
2:30

TUNER

FM

3

AM
PRESET

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

SCENE
TV

NET

1 List name

1 Playback indicator

2 Contents list

2 Playback information

Displays the list of Internet radio content. Use the cursor keys to select an
item and press ENTER to confirm the selection.

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

[DISPLAY] to List Browse

DIRECT

SLEEP

BD
DVD

1/7
[DISPLAY] to Now Playing

Displays the station name, album name, song title, and elapsed time.

3 Item number/total
VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY
D

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

Cursor keys
ENTER

MUTE

External device
operation keys
2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10
TV

MUTE

Use the cursor keys to select an icon and press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
Icon

Function
Moves 10 pages backward.

ENT

Moves to the previous page of the list.

INPUT
TV VOL

• Some information may not be available depending on the station.

5 Operation menu

MODE

1

• Use the external device operation key (s) to stop playback.

4 Playback indicator

TV CH

Moves to the next page of the list.
Moves 10 pages forward.
Moves to the playback screen.

PLAYBACK ➤

Listening to Internet radio

En

57

Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)
The AirPlay function allows you to play back iTunes/iPod music on
the unit via network.

Playback of iTunes/iPod music contents
Follow the procedure below to play back iTunes/iPod music
contents on the unit.

iTunes
PC

1
Router
The unit
Starts playback
on iTunes
or iPod

Turn on the unit, and start iTunes on the PC or
display the playback screen on the iPod.
If the iTunes/iPod recognizes the unit, the AirPlay icon
(
) appears.
iTunes (example)

iPod (example)

Playback starts

iPod

• To use this function, the unit and your PC or iPod must be connected to the same
router (p.27). You can check whether the network parameters (such as the IP
address) are properly assigned to the unit in “Information” (p.79) in the “Setup”
menu.

Supported iTunes/iPods (as of December 2011)

• If the icon does not appear, check whether the unit and PC/iPod are
connected to the router properly.

2

• iTunes 10.2.2 or later (Windows/Mac)

On the iTunes/iPod, click (tap) the AirPlay icon and
select the unit (network name of the unit) as the
audio output device.

• iPod touch, iPhone or iPad with iOS 4.3.3 or later

iTunes (example)

iPod (example)

Network name of the unit

3

Select a song and start playback.

The unit automatically selects “AirPlay” as the input source and
starts playback.
The playback screen is displayed on the TV.

• The playback screen is available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

En

58

CODE SET

• You can turn on the unit automatically when starting playback on iTunes or iPod by
setting “Network Standby” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu to “On”.

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

• You can edit the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on
iTunes/iPod in “Network Name” (p.78) in the “Setup” menu.

AV

B

• To adjust the unit’s volume from the iTunes/iPod, set “Volume Interlock” (p.65) in
the “Option” menu to “Limited” (default) or “Full”.

ZONE

FM

AM

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

Caution

TUNING

• When you use iTunes/iPod controls to adjust volume, the volume may be
unexpectedly loud. This could result in damage to the unit or speakers. If the
volume suddenly increases during playback, stop playback on the iTunes/iPod
immediately.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

iTunes (example of English version)

• If you select the other input source on the unit during playback, playback on the
iTunes/iPod stops automatically.

TUNER

INFO

• To control iTunes playback with the remote control of the unit, you need to
configure the iTunes preferences to enable iTunes control from remote speakers in
advance.

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

■ Playback screen
RETURN

Check this box

VOLUME

ENTER
DISPLAY
D

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

1

AirPlay
Now Playing

MUTE

MODE

Artist Name

External device
operation keys
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

Album Name

2

Song Title
2:30

5:30

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

1 Playback indicator
2 Playback information
Displays the artist name, album name, song title, and elapsed time/song
length.

Use the following remote control keys to control playback.
External device
operation keys

Function

a

Resumes playback from pause.

s

Stops playback.

d

Stops playback temporarily.

f
g

Skips forward/backward.

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back iTunes/iPod music via a network (AirPlay)

En

59

Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only)
The Zone A/B function allows you to play back an input source in
the room where the unit is installed (Zone A) and in another room
(Zone B).
For example, you can turn on Zone A (turn off Zone B) when you
are in the living room, and turn on Zone B (turn off Zone A) when
you are in the study room. Also, you can turn on both zones when
you want to enjoy the same input source in those rooms
simultaneously.

Preparing Zone B
Connect the device that will be used in Zone B to the unit.
Caution
• Remove the unit’s power cable from the AC wall outlet before connecting
speakers.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch one another or
come into contact with the unit’s metal parts. Doing so may damage the unit
or the speakers. If the speaker cables short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will
appear on the front display when the unit is turned on.

Connect the speakers placed in Zone B to the unit with speaker
cables.
To utilize the SURROUND BACK/BI AMP/ZONE B jacks for Zone B
speakers, set “Power Amp Assign” (p.69) in the “Setup” menu to
“ZoneB” after connecting the power cable to an AC wall outlet.
Study room (Zone B)

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS
PB
FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

Y
OR OUT

Living room (Zone A)
SUBWOOFER

• Multichannel sources are mixed down to 2 channels and output to the zone B.
• The same input source and volume setting are applied to both zones.

1

• You can automatically enable/disable the audio output to Zone A/B in conjunction
with a scene selection (p.35)

1

9

2

2

3

4

5

Zone B

Zone A

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only)

En

60

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

B
ZONE

■ Adjusting the volume for Zone B

1

If you are bothered by volume differences between Zone A/B,
follow the procedure below to adjust the volume for Zone B.

Input selection keys

Press ZONE A or ZONE B to enable/disable audio
output to Zone A or Zone B.

ZONE A
ZONE B

“SP A” lights up in the front display when the Zone A output
is enabled and “SP B” lights up when the Zone B output is
enabled.

HDMI

1

■ Basic playback procedure

1
2

TUNER

FM

“SP A” and/or “SP B” light up

AM
PRESET

INFO

Use the cursor keys to select “Volume Trim”
(Volume Trim) and press ENTER.

TUNING

VOL.

MEMORY

SP A
SP B

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT
MOVIE

Press OPTION.

HDMI1

MUSIC
ENHANCER

DIRECT

L
SL

SW
C

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

R
SR

• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

2

Use the input selection keys to select an input
source.

VOLUME

3

Start playback on the external device or select a
radio station.

Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)

4

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

Default
0.0 dB

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

Cursor keys
ENTER
RETURN

MODE

1

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

4

8

3

OPTION

OPTION

SETUP

4

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “ZoneB Trim”
(ZB.Trim) and the cursor keys (e/r) to adjust the
setting.

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

PLAYBACK ➤ Playing back music in multiple rooms (RX-V573 only)

En

61

Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)
You can configure separate playback settings for different playback sources. This
menu is available on the front panel (or on the TV screen), allowing you to easily
configure settings during playback.

1

Press OPTION.

Option menu items
• Available items vary depending on the selected input source.
• Text in parentheses denotes indicators on the front display.

OPTION

VOL.

ToneControl

L
SL

SW
C

Item

Function

Tone Control (Tone Control)

Adjusts the high-frequency range and low-frequency
range of sounds.

63

DSP Level
(DSP Level)

Adjusts the sound field effect level.

63

Adaptive DRC
(A.DRC)

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to
minimum) is automatically adjusted when the volume
is adjusted.

63

(RX-V573 only)
Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources
when surround back speakers are used.

63

Enhancer
(Enhancer)

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

64

Input Trim
(In.Trim)

Corrects volume differences between input sources.

64

Front display

Option
Tone Control
DSP/Surround
Volume Trim
Lipsync
Signal Info
Audio In

DSP/Surround
(DSP/Surround) Extended
Surround
(EXTD)

TV screen

2

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

3
4

Page

R
SR

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting.

Volume Trim
(Volume Trim)

Subwoofer Trim
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
(SW.Trim)

64

(RX-V573 only)
Corrects volume differences between Zone A/B.

61

Lipsync (Lipsync)

Enables/disables the “Lipsync” setting in the “Setup”
menu.

64

Signal Info (Signal Info)

Displays information about the video/audio signal.

64

Audio In (Audio In)

Combines the video jack of the selected input source
with an audio jack of others.

65

Video Out (Video Out)

Selects a video to be output with radio sounds.

65

Auto Preset (Auto Preset)

Automatically registers FM radio stations with strong
signals as presets.

43

Clear Preset (Clear Preset)

Clear radio stations registered to preset numbers.

44

ZoneB Trim
(ZB.Trim)

To exit from the menu, press OPTION.

(U.K. and Europe models only)
Traffic Program (TrafficProgram) Automatically searches for a traffic information
station.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

45

En

62

Item

Function

Page

Repeat (Repeat)

Configures the repeat setting for the iPod (p.49),
USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55).

—

Shuffle (Shuffle)

Configures the shuffle setting for the iPod (p.49),
USB storage device (p.52), or media server (p.55).

—

Volume Interlock (Interlock)

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod
via AirPlay.

65

■ Tone Control (Tone Control)
Adjusts the high-frequency range (Treble) and low-frequency range (Bass) of sounds.

Default
Bypass (Bypass)

• If you set an extreme value, sounds may not match those from other channels.

Settings
On (On)

Automatically adjusts the dynamic range.

Off (Off) (default)

The dynamic range is not automatically adjusted.

If “On” is selected, the dynamic range becomes narrow at a low volume and wide at a
high volume.
Volume: low

On
Off
Input level

Volume: high
Output level

Setting range
-6.0 dB to Bypass (Bypass) to +6.0 dB, *0.5 dB increments

Sets whether the dynamic range (from maximum to minimum) is automatically adjusted
when the volume level is adjusted. When it is set to “On”, it is useful for listening to
playback at a low volume at night.

Output level

Choices
Treble (Treble), Bass (Bass)

❑ Adaptive DRC (A.DRC)

On
Off
Input level

❑ Extended Surround (EXTD)
(RX-V573 only)

Adjusting with the front panel controls
a Press TONE CONTROL to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
b Press PROGRAM to make an adjustment.

■ DSP/Surround (DSP/Surround)

Selects how to play back 5.1- to 7.1-channel sources when surround back speakers
are used.
Settings
Auto (Auto)
(default)

Automatically selects the most suitable decoder if signals that contain
surround back channel signals are input, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel. If two surround back speakers are connected,
the unit reproduces the 5.1-channel signals in 7.1-channel.

bPLIIx Movie
(bPLIIxMo)

Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Movie decoder. This setting is available only when two surround
back speakers are connected.

bPLIIx Music
(bPLIIxMu)

Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel using the Dolby Pro
Logic IIx Music decoder. This setting is available only when one or two
surround back speakers are connected.

EX/ES (EX/ES)

Automatically selects the Dolby EX or DTS-ES decoder, and
reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.

Off (Off)

Always reproduces signals in their original channels. (Even when
DTS-ES or Dolby Digital EX signal is input, the unit reproduces the
signal in 5.1-channel.)

Configures the sound field program and surround settings.

❑ DSP Level (DSP Level)
Adjusts the sound field effect level.
Setting range
-6 dB to +3 dB (1 dB increments)
Default
0 dB

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

En

63

■ Lipsync (Lipsync)
• Some Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES sources do not contain a flag for reproducing surround back channel. In
this case, the unit reproduces the signals in 5.1-channel if “Extended Surround” is set to “Auto”. To
reproduce the signals in 6.1 or 7.1-channel, set it to “bPLIIx Movie”, “bPLIIx Music”, or “EX/ES”.

Enables/disables the adjustment configured in “Lipsync” (p.74) in the “Setup” menu.

❑ Enhancer (Enhancer)

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Settings

Enables/disables Compressed Music Enhancer (p.41).

• This setting is applied separately to each input source.
• You can also use ENHANCER on the remote control to enable/disable Compressed Music Enhancer
(p.41).

Settings

Off (Off)

Disables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

On (On) (default)

Enables the “Lipsync” adjustment.

■ Signal Info (Signal Info)
Displays information about the video/audio signal.

Off (Off)

Disables Compressed Music Enhancer.

On (On)

Enables Compressed Music Enhancer.

Choices

Default
USB, SERVER, NET RADIO, AirPlay, TUNER: On (On)
Others: Off (Off)

■ Volume Trim (Volume Trim)
Fine-adjusts volume difference between input sources or subwoofer volume.

❑ Input Trim (In.Trim)

Format (FORMAT)

Audio format of the input signal

Channel (CHAN)

The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE)
For example, “3/2/0.1” means 3 front channels, 2 surround channels,
and LFE.

Sampling (SAMPL)

The number of samples per second of the input digital signal

Bitrate (B RATE)

The amount of data per second of the input bitstream signal

Input (V IN)

Type and resolution of input signal

Output (V OUT)

Type and resolution of output signal

Corrects volume differences between input sources. If you are bothered by volume
differences when switching between input sources, use this function to correct it.
• To switch the information on the front display, press the cursor keys (q/w) repeatedly.
• This setting is applied separately to each input source.

Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB

❑ Subwoofer Trim (SW.Trim)
Fine-adjusts the subwoofer volume.
Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
0.0 dB

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

En

64

■ Audio In (Audio In)

■ Volume Interlock (Interlock)

Combines the video jack of the selected input source (HDMI 1–4 or AV 1–2) with an
audio jack of others. For example, use this function in the following cases.

Enables/disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod via AirPlay.

• Connecting a playback device that supports HDMI video output, but not HDMI audio
output
• Connecting a playback device that has component video jacks and analog stereo
jacks (such as game consoles)
Input sources
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–2

Settings
Off (Off)

Disables volume controls from iTunes/iPod.

Limited (Ltd)
(default)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod within the limited range (-80
dB to 0 dB and mute).

Full (Full)

Enables volume controls from iTunes/iPod in the full range (-80 dB to
+16.5 dB and mute).

■ Setup procedure
(To input audio through a digital optical jack)
Select “AV 1” or “AV 4” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital optical cable.
(To input audio through a digital coaxial jack)
Select “AV 2” or “AV 3” and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding audio jacks
with a digital coaxial cable.
(To input audio through analog audio jacks)
Select “AV 5”, “AV 6”, or “AUDIO”, and connect the device to the unit’s corresponding
audio jacks with a stereo pin cable.

■ Video Out (Video Out)
Selects a video to be output with radio sounds.
Settings
Off (Off) (default)

Does not output video.

HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6,
V-AUX

Outputs video input through the corresponding video input jacks.

PLAYBACK ➤ Configuring playback settings for different playback sources (Option menu)

En

65

CONFIGURATIONS
Configuring various functions (Setup menu)
You can configure the unit’s various function with the menu displayed on the TV screen.

• Operations with TV screen are available only when your TV is connected to the unit via HDMI. If not, carry
out operations while viewing the front display.

1
2

Press SETUP.
Use the cursor keys to select a menu and press ENTER.

Setup
Speaker

Configuration

HDMI

Distance

Sound

Level

ECO

Equalizer

Function

Test Tone

Network
Language

3

Use the cursor keys to select an item and press ENTER.

Setup
Speaker

Configuration

HDMI

Distance

Sound

Level

ECO

Equalizer

Function

Test Tone

Network
Language

• To return to the previous screen during menu operations, press RETURN.

4
5

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select a setting and press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.
CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

66

Setup menu items
Menu

Item

Configuration

Function
Power Amp Assign

(RX-V573 only)
Selects a speaker system.

Subwoofer

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.

69

Front

Selects the size of the front speakers.

69

Center

Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

69

Surround

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their size.

70

Surround Back

(RX-V573 only)
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their size.

70

Crossover

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component that can be output from speakers whose size is set to “Small”.

70

Subwoofer Phase

Sets the phase of the subwoofer.

70

Extra Bass

Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.

70

Speaker

HDMI

Page
69

Distance

Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position.

71

Level

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.

71

Equalizer

Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

71

Test Tone

Enables/disables the test tone output.

71

HDMI Control

Enables/disables HDMI Control.

72

Audio Output

Selects a device to output audio.

72

Standby Through

Selects whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the unit is in standby mode.

72

TV Audio Input

Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input.

72

Standby Sync

Selects whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit.

73

ARC

Enables/disables ARC.

73

SCENE

Enables/disables SCENE link playback.

73

Configuration

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

67

Menu

Item

Function

Page

CINEMA DSP 3D Mode

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

73

Panorama

Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.

73

Center Width

Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field.

74

Dimension

Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields.

74

Center Image

Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field.

74

Select

Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.

74

Adjustment

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually.

74

Dynamic Range

Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and DTS signals) playback.

75

Max Volume

Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

75

Initial Volume

Sets the initial volume for when this receiver is turned on.

75

Auto Power Down

Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function.

75

ECO Mode

Enables/disables the eco mode (power saving mode).

76

Input Rename

Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.

76

Dimmer

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.

77

Memory Guard

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

77

IP Address

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

77

MAC Address Filter

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

78

DMC Control

Selects whether to allow a DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control playback.

78

DSP Parameter

Sound
Lipsync

Volume

ECO

Function

Network

Language

Network Standby

Selects whether to enable/disable the function that turns on the unit from other network devices.

78

Network Name

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network devices.

78

Information

Displays the network information on the unit.

79

Network Update

Updates the firmware via the network.

79

Select an on-screen menu language.

79

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

68

❑ Subwoofer

Speaker

Selects whether or not a subwoofer is connected.
Configures the speaker settings manually.
Settings
Setup
Speaker

Configuration

HDMI

Distance

Sound

Level

ECO

Equalizer

Function

Test Tone

Use (default)

Select this option when a subwoofer is connected.
The subwoofer will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel audio
and low-frequency components from other channels.

None

Select this option when no subwoofer is connected.
The front speakers will produce LFE (low-frequency effect) channel
audio and low-frequency components from other channels.

Network
Language

❑ Front
Selects the size of the front speakers.

■ Configuration

Settings

Configures the output characteristics of the speakers.

• When you configure the speaker size, select “Large” if the woofer diameter of your speaker is 16 cm
(6-1/4”) or larger or “Small” if it is smaller than 16 cm (6-1/4”).

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer will produce front channel low-frequency components
(configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The front speakers will produce all of the front channel frequency
components.

❑ Power Amp Assign
(RX-V573 only)
Selects a speaker system.

• “Front” is automatically set to “Large” when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”.

In addition to the 5.1- or 7.1-channel speaker system, various speaker configurations
are possible using the Zone B speakers or bi-amp connection.

❑ Center
Selects whether or not a center speaker is connected and its size.

Settings
Basic (default)

Select this option when you use a normal speaker system (not using
Zone B speakers or a bi-amp connection).

BI-AMP

Select this option when you connect front speakers that support
bi-amp connections (p.16).

ZoneB

Select this option when you use Zone B speakers (p.60) in addition to
the speaker system in the main zone (Zone A).

Settings

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce center channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The center speaker will produce all of the center channel frequency
components.

None

Select this option when no center speaker is connected.
The front speakers will produce center channel audio.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

69

❑ Surround

❑ Crossover

Selects whether or not surround speakers are connected and their sizes.

Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency components that can be output from a speaker
whose size is set to “Small”. A frequency sound lower than the specified value will be
produced from the subwoofer or front speakers.

Settings

Small (default)

Select this option for small speakers.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large

Select this option for large speakers.
The surround speakers will produce all of the surround channel
frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround speakers are connected.
The front speakers will produce surround channel audio. Virtual
CINEMA DSP works when you select a sound program.

❑ Surround Back

Settings
40 Hz, 60 Hz, 80 Hz (default), 90 Hz, 100 Hz, 110 Hz, 120 Hz, 160 Hz, 200 Hz

• If the volume and crossover frequency are adjustable on your subwoofer, set the volume to half and
crossover frequency to maximum.

❑ Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of the subwoofer. When the bass sound is lacking or unclear, switch the
subwoofer phase.
Settings

(RX-V573 only)
Selects whether or not surround back speakers are connected and their sizes.
Settings

Small x1

Select this option when one small speaker is connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Small x2 (default)

Select this option when two small speakers are connected.
The subwoofer or front speakers will produce surround back channel
low-frequency components (configurable in “Crossover”).

Large x1

Select this option when one large speaker is connected.
The surround back speaker will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

Large x2

Select this option when two large speakers are connected.
The surround back speakers will produce all of the surround back
channel frequency components.

None

Select this option when no surround back speakers are connected.
The surround speakers and subwoofer (or front speakers) will produce
surround back channel audio.

Normal (default)

Does not reverse the subwoofer phase.

Reverse

Reverses the subwoofer phase.

❑ Extra Bass
Sets the speakers to produce the front channel low-frequency components.
Settings
Off (default)

Depending on the size of the front speakers, either the subwoofer or
front speakers produce the front channel low-frequency components.

On

Both the front speakers and subwoofer produce the front channel
low-frequency components.

• This setting is not available when “Subwoofer” is set to “None”, or when “Front” is set to “Small”.

• “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None” when “Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”, or
when “Surround” is set to “None”.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

70

■ Distance
Sets the distance between each speaker and listening position so that sounds from the
speakers reach the listening position at the same time. First, select the unit of distance
from “Meter” or “Feet”.

• “PEQ” is available only when the YPAO has been performed (p.30).

■ Manual equalizer adjustment

Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (RX-V573 only),
Surround Back R (RX-V573 only), Subwoofer

1
2

Set “EQ Select” to “GEQ”.

Setting range
0.30 m to 24.00 m (1.0 ft to 80.0 ft), *0.05 m (0.2 ft) increments

3

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select the desired band (frequency) and the cursor
keys (e/r) to adjust the gain.

Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Center: 2.60 m (8.6 ft)
Others: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select “Channel” and the cursor keys (e/r) to select
the desired speaker channel.

Setting range
-6.0 dB to +6.0 dB

Equalizer

■ Level

EQ Select
GEQ Edit
Channel
63Hz
160Hz
400Hz
1kHz
2.5kHz
6.3kHz
16kHz

Adjusts the volume of each speaker.
Choices
Front L, Front R, Center, Surround L, Surround R, Surround Back L (RX-V573 only),
Surround Back R (RX-V573 only), Subwoofer
Setting range
-10.0 dB to +10.0 dB (0.5 dB increments)
Default
Front L, Front R, Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
Others: -1.0 dB

GEQ
Front L

Back:RETURN

4

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

■ Test Tone
Enables/disables the test tone output. Test tone output helps you to adjust the speaker
balance or equalizer while confirming its effect.

■ Equalizer
Adjusts the tone with an equalizer.

Settings

❑ EQ Select

Off (default)

Does not output test tones.

Selects the type of equalizer to be used.

On

Outputs test tones automatically when you adjust the speaker balance
or equalizer.

Settings
PEQ

Applies the parametric equalizer values obtained by the YPAO
measurement (p.30).

GEQ (default)

Select this option when you want to adjust the equalizer manually.
For details, see “Manual equalizer adjustment”.

Off

Does not use the equalizer.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

71

HDMI

HDMI OUT (TV)
Enables/disables the audio output from a TV connected to the HDMI OUT jack.

Configures the HDMI settings.

Setup
Speaker

Settings
Off (default)

Disables the audio output from the TV.

On

Enables the audio output from the TV.

Configuration

HDMI

❑ Standby Through

Sound
ECO
Function

Select whether to output videos/audio (input through HDMI jacks) to the TV when the
unit is in standby mode. If this function is set to “On”, you can use the input selection
keys (HDMI 1–4) to select an HDMI input even when the unit is in standby mode (the
standby indicator on the unit blinks).

Network
Language

Settings

■ Configuration
❑ HDMI Control

Off (default)

Does not output videos/audio to the TV.

On

Outputs videos/audio to the TV.
(The unit consumes approximately 1 W of power.)

Enables/disables HDMI Control (p.96).
Settings
Off (default)

Disables HDMI Control.

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

On

Enables HDMI Control.
Configure the settings in “TV Audio Input”, “Standby Sync”, “ARC”,
and “SCENE”.

❑ TV Audio Input
Selects an audio input jack of the unit to be used for TV audio input when “HDMI
Control” is set to “On”. The unit’s input source automatically switches to TV audio when
the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner.

• To use HDMI control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96) after connecting HDMI
Control-compatible devices.

Settings
AV 1–6, AUDIO

❑ Audio Output

Default
AV 4

Selects a device to output audio.

• This setting is available only when “HDMI Control” is set to “Off”.

• When using ARC to input TV audio to the unit, you cannot use the input jacks selected here for connecting
an external device because the input will be used for TV audio input.

Amp
Enables/disables the audio output from the speakers connected to the unit.
Settings
Off

Disables the audio output from the speakers.

On (default)

Enables the audio output from the speakers.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

72

❑ Standby Sync

Sound

Select whether to use HDMI control to link the standby behavior of the TV and the unit
when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Configures the audio output settings.

Settings
Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

On

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off.

Auto (default)

Sets the unit to standby mode when the TV is turned off only when the
unit is receiving TV audio or HDMI signals.

Setup
Speaker

DSP Parameter

HDMI

Lipsync

Sound

Volume

ECO
Function
Network
Language

❑ ARC
Enables/disables ARC (p.18) when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
Settings
Off

Disables ARC.

On (default)

Enables ARC.

■ DSP Parameter
Configures the surround decoder settings.

❑ CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
• You do not need to change this setting normally. In case noises are produced from the speakers connected
to the unit because TV audio signals input to the unit via ARC are not supported by the unit, set “ARC” to
“Off” and use the TV’s speakers.

Enables/disables CINEMA DSP 3D (p.39). If this function is set to “On”, CINEMA DSP
3D functions with the selected sound programs (except 2ch Stereo and 7ch/5ch
Stereo).
Settings

❑ SCENE
Enables/disable SCENE link playback when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.

Off

Disables CINEMA DSP 3D.

When SCENE link playback is enabled, HDMI Control-compatible devices connected
to the unit via HDMI automatically works as follows, with a scene selection.

On (default)

Enables CINEMA DSP 3D.

• TV: turning on and displaying video from the playback device
• Playback device: starting playback
Choices (SCENE keys)
BD/DVD, TV, NET, RADIO
Settings

❑ Panorama
Enables/disables the broadening effect of the front sound field. When this function is
enabled, you can wrap front right/left channel sounds around the field and generate a
spacious sound field in combination with the surround sound field. This setting is
effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (RX-V573 only) is selected.
Settings

Off

Disables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.

On

Enables SCENE link playback for the selected SCENE key.

Off (default)

Disables the broadening effect of the front sound field.

On

Enables the broadening effect of the front sound field.

Default
BD/DVD, TV: On
NET, RADIO: Off

• SCENE link playback may not work properly due to the compatibility between devices. We recommend
using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works more effectively.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

73

❑ Center Width

■ Lipsync

Adjusts the broadening effect of the center sound field. Higher to enhance the
broadening effect, and lower to reduce it (closer to center). This setting is effective
when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (RX-V573 only) is selected.

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output.

Setting range
0 to 7
Default
3

❑ Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front and surround sound fields. Higher to
strengthen the front sound field and lower to strengthen the surround sound field. This
setting is effective when “bPLII Music” or “bPLIIx Music” (RX-V573 only) is selected.
Setting range
-3 to +3

• You can enable/disable the Lipsync function by input sources in “Lipsync” (p.64) in the “Option” menu.

❑ Select
Selects the method to adjust the delay between video and audio output.
Setting range

Manual

Select this option when you want to adjust the delay between video
and audio output manually.
Adjust the audio output timing in “Adjustment”.

Auto (default)

Adjusts the delay between video and audio output automatically when
a TV that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to the
unit via HDMI.
If necessary, you can fine-adjust the audio output timing in
“Adjustment”.

Default
0

❑ Center Image
Adjusts the center orientation level (broadening effect) of the front sound field. Higher
to strengthen the center orientation level (less broadening effect) and lower to weaken
(more broadening effect). This setting is effective when “Neo:6 Music” is selected.
Setting range
0.0 to 1.0
Default
0.3

• “Select” is automatically set to “Manual” depending on the TV connected to the unit.

❑ Adjustment
Adjusts the delay between video and audio output manually when “Select” is set to
“Manual”. You can fine-adjust the audio output timing when “Select” is set to “Auto”.
Setting range
0 ms to 250 ms (1 ms increments)
Default
0 ms

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

74

■ Volume

ECO

Configures the volume settings.

Configures the power supply settings.

❑ Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for bitstream audio (Dolby Digital and
DTS signals) playback.
Settings

Setup
Speaker

Auto Power Down

HDMI

ECO Mode

Sound
ECO

Maximum (default)

Produces audio without adjusting the dynamic range.

Standard

Optimizes the dynamic range for regular home use.

Min/Auto

Sets the dynamic range for clear sound even at night or at low
volumes.
When playing back Dolby TrueHD signals, the dynamic range is
automatically adjusted based on the input signal information.

Function
Network
Language

■ Auto Power Down
Sets the amount of time for the auto-standby function. If you do not operate the unit for
the specified time, the unit will automatically go into standby mode.

❑ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume to prevent excessive loudness.

Settings

Setting range
-30.0 dB to +15.0 dB (5.0 dB increments), +16.5 dB

Off

Does not set the unit to standby mode automatically.

Default
+16.5 dB

2 hours, 4 hours,
8 hours, 12 hours

Sets the unit to standby mode when you have not operated the unit for
the specified time. For example, when “2 hours” is selected, the unit
will switch to standby mode if you do not operate it for 2 hours.

❑ Initial Volume
Sets the initial volume when the receiver is turned on.
Settings
Off (default)

Sets the level to the volume level of the unit when it last entered
standby mode.

Mute

Sets the unit to mute the audio output.

Default
U.K. and Europe models: 8 hours
Other models: Off

• Just before the unit enters standby mode, “AutoPowerDown” appears and then countdown starts in the
front display.

-80.0 dB to +16.5 dB
Sets the level to the specified volume level.
(0.5 dB increments)

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

75

■ ECO Mode

Function

Enables/disables the eco (power saving) mode.
When the eco mode is enabled, you can reduce the unit’s power consumption.

Configures the functions that make the unit easier to use.

Settings
Setup

Off (default)

Disables the eco mode.

On

Enables the eco mode.

Speaker

Input Rename

HDMI

Dimmer

Sound

Memory Guard

ECO
Function
Network
Language

• Be sure to press ENTER to restart the unit after selecting a setting. The new setting will take effect after the
unit is restarted.
• When “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, the front panel display may become dark.
• If you want to play audio at high volume, set “ECO Mode” to “Off”.

■ Input Rename
Changes the input source name displayed on the front display.
Input sources
HDMI 1–4, AV 1–6, AUDIO, USB, V-AUX

■ Procedure

1

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source to be renamed and press
ENTER.

• To select a name from the presets, use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an input source and the
cursor keys (e/r) to select a preset name.

2

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.

Input Rename
HDMI1
B l u - r a y
OK:ENTER
CANCEL:RETURN

3

To confirm the new name, press ENTER.

• To cancel the entry, press RETURN.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

76

4
5

To change another input source name, repeat steps 1 to 3.

Network

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Configures the network settings.

■ Dimmer

Setup

Adjusts the brightness of the front display.
Setting range
-4 to 0 (higher to brighten)
Default
0

• The front display may become dark when “ECO Mode” (p.76) is set to “On”.

■ Memory Guard

Off (default)

Does not protect the settings.

On

Protects the settings until “Off” is selected.

o

DMC Control

ECO

Network Standby

Function

Network Name

Network

Information

Language

Network Update

■ IP Address

Select whether to use a DHCP server.
Settings

• When “Memory Guard” is set to “On”, the lock icon (o) is displayed on the menu screen.

On

MAC Address Filter

Sound

❑ DHCP

Settings

Memory Guard

IP Address

HDMI

Configures the network parameters (such as IP address).

Prevents accidental changes to the settings.

Memory Guard

Speaker

Icon

Off

Does not use a DHCP server. Configure the network parameters
manually. For details, see “Manual network settings”.

On (default)

Uses a DHCP server to automatically obtain the unit’s network
parameters (such as IP address).

■ Manual network settings

1
2

Set “DHCP” to “Off”.
Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select a parameter type.
IP Address

Specifies an IP address.

Back:RETURN

Subnet Mask

Specifies a subnet mask.

Default Gateway

Specifies the IP address of the default gateway.

DNS Server (P)

Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server.

DNS Server (S)

Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.

4

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

77

■ MAC Address Filter

■ Network Standby

Sets the MAC address filter to limit access to the unit from other network devices.

Selects whether the unit can be turned on from other network devices (network
standby).

❑ Filter

Settings

Enables/disables the MAC address filter.

Off (default)

Disables the network standby function.

On

Enables the network standby function.
(The unit consumes approximately 2 W of power.)

Settings
Off (default)

Disables the MAC address filter.

On

Enables the MAC address filter. In “MAC Address 1–10”, specify the
MAC addresses of the network devices that will be permitted access
to the unit.

❑ MAC Address 1–10
Specifies the MAC addresses (up to 10) of the network devices that will be permitted
access to the unit when “Filter” is set to “On”.

3

Edits the network name (the unit’s name on the network) displayed on other network
devices.
■ Procedure

1
2

■ Procedure

1
2

■ Network Name

Use the cursor keys (q/w) to select an MAC address number (1 to 10).
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a value.

Press ENTER to enter the name edit screen.
Use the cursor keys (e/r) to move the edit position and the cursor keys (q/w) to
select a character.

Network Name

To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

Y A M A H A

x x x x x x

■ DMC Control
Selects whether to allow DLNA-compatible Digital Media Controller (DMC) to control
playback.
Settings
Disable

Does not allow DMCs to control playback.

Enable (default)

Allows DMCs to control playback.

Back:RETURN

3
4

To confirm the new name, press ENTER.
To exit from the menu, press SETUP.

• A Digital Media Controller (DMC) is a device that can control other network devices through the network.
When this function is enabled, you can control playback of the unit from DMCs (such as Windows Media
Player 12) on the same network.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

78

■ Information

Language

Displays the network information on the unit.
MAC Address
IP Address

IP address

Subnet Mask

Subnet mask

Default Gateway

The IP address of the default gateway

DNS Server (P)

Select an on-screen menu language.

MAC address

The IP address of the primary DNS server

DNS Server (S)

The IP address of the secondary DNS server

Status

The connection status of the NETWORK jack

vTuner ID

The ID of the Internet radio (vTuner)

Setup
Speaker

English

HDMI

Français

Sound

Deutsch

ECO

Español

Function

Русский

Network

中文

Language

Settings

■ Network Update

English (default)

English

Updates the firmware via the network.

Français

French

❑ Perform Update

Deutsch

German

Español

Spanish

Starts the process to update the unit’s firmware. For details, see “Updating the unit’s
firmware” (p.85).

❑ Firmware Version

Russian
Chinese

Displays the version of the firmware installed on the unit.

❑ System ID

• Chinese characters used in content information (such as song titles) cannot be displayed.
• The information on the front display is provided in English only.

Displays the system ID number.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Configuring various functions (Setup menu)

En

79

Changing the speaker impedance setting (SP IMP.)

Configuring the system settings
(ADVANCED SETUP menu)

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Configure the system settings of the unit while viewing the front display.

1
2

SPIMP.8MIN

Set the unit to standby mode.

Change the unit’s speaker impedance settings depending on the impedance of the
speakers connected.

While holding down STRAIGHT on the front panel, press z (power).

Settings
z (power)

PROGRAM

3
4
5

STRAIGHT

6 Ω MIN

Select this option when you connect 6-ohm speakers to the unit. You
can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers.

8 Ω MIN (default)

Select this option when you connect 8-ohm or higher speakers to the
unit.

Selecting the remote control ID (REMOTE ID)

Press PROGRAM to select an item.
Press STRAIGHT to select a setting.

REMOTEIDID1

Press z (power) to set the unit to standby mode and turn it on again.
The new settings take effect.

Change the unit’s remote control ID so that it matches the remote control’s ID (default:
ID1). When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can set each remote control with a
unique remote control ID for its corresponding receiver.
Settings
ID1 (default), ID2

ADVANCED SETUP menu items
Item

Function

Page

SP IMP.

(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Changes the speaker impedance setting.

80

REMOTE ID

Selects the unit’s remote control ID.

80

TU

(Asia and General models only)
Changes the FM/AM tuning frequency setting.

81

TV FORMAT

Switches the video signal type of HDMI output.

81

■ Changing the remote control ID of the remote control
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute. Otherwise, the setting will be
automatically canceled.

1

Press CODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object, such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.

2
3

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
Use the numeric keys to enter “5019” (ID1) or “5020” (ID2).

INIT

Restores the default settings.

81

Once the remote control ID is registered successfully, SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

UPDATE

Updates the firmware.

81

If it blinks six times, registration failed. Repeat from Step 1.

VERSION

Checks the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

81
• The registered remote control codes (p.82) are not cleared even if you change the remote control ID.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

En

80

Changing the FM/AM tuning frequency setting (TU)

Updating the firmware (UPDATE)

(Asia and General models only)

TUFM50/AM9
Change the FM/AM tuning frequency setting of the unit depending on your country or
region.
Settings
FM100/AM10

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 100-kHz
steps and AM by 10-kHz steps.

FM50/AM9 (default)

Select this when you want to adjust the FM frequency by 50-kHz steps
and AM by 9-kHz steps.

Switching the video signal type (TV FORMAT)

TVFORMATNTSC

UPDATEUSB
New firmware that provides additional features or product improvements will be
released as needed. Updates can be downloaded from our website. If the unit is
connected to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network. For details,
refer to the information supplied with updates.
■ Firmware update procedure
Do not perform this procedure unless firmware update is necessary. Also, make sure
you read the information supplied with updates before updating the firmware.

1

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select “USB” or “NETWORK” and press INFO to
start firmware update.
Choices
USB

Update the firmware using a USB memory device.

NETWORK

Update the firmware via the network.

Switch the video signal type of HDMI output so that it matches to the format of your TV.
Since the unit automatically selects the video signal type so that it matches to the TV, it
is unnecessary to change the setting normally. Change the setting only when images
on the TV screen do not appear correctly.
Settings
NTSC, PAL

• If the unit detects newer firmware over the network, the envelope icon (p) will appear in the “Network
Update” screen. In this case, you can also update the unit’s firmware by following the procedure in
“Updating the unit’s firmware” (p.85).

Checking the firmware version (VERSION)

Default
U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models: NTSC
Other models: PAL

Restoring the default settings (INIT)

INITCANCEL

VERSIONxx.xx
Check the version of firmware currently installed on the unit.

• You can also check the firmware version in “Network Update” (p.79) in the “Setup” menu.

Restores the default settings for the unit.
Choices
ALL

Restores the default settings for the unit.

CANCEL

Does not perform an initialization.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤

Configuring the system settings (ADVANCED SETUP menu)

En

81

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

CODE SET

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate external devices
(such as BD/DVD players) if you have registered the remote control
code of the external device.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

AV

1

ZONE

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

NET

• If the unit’s remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, the
registered codes may be cleared. If this happens, insert new batteries and register
the codes again.

If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

■ TV operations

RADIO

• Under the unit’s default settings, the amplifier code (Yamaha: 5098) is set for all
the input selection keys. With this setting, you can control HDMI
Control-compatible devices connected to the unit with the remote control. (This
function may not work depending on the specification of the external device.)

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.

Once the remote control code is successfully registered,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

SCENE
TV

Press TV z.

• Ensure that the remote control ID of the external device is set to “ID1”. If any other
ID is selected, the remote control operations may not work properly.

SLEEP

BD
DVD

3
4

• You cannot control an external device that does not have a remote control sensor.

TUNER

FM

Controlling external devices with the remote control

SOURCE/RECEIVER

Once you have registered the remote control code for your TV, you
can control it using the TV operation keys, regardless of the input
source selected on the unit.

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

Registering the remote control code for a TV

MODE

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate a TV if you have
registered its remote control code.
Numeric keys

TV operation keys

INPUT

Switches the video inputs of the TV.

MUTE

Mutes the audio output of the TV.

TV VOL

Adjust the volume of the TV.

TV CH

Switch the channels of the TV

TV z

Turns on/off the TV.

ENT

TV
INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

TV CH

TV operation keys
TV z

• You can also register your TV’s remote control code to the unit’s input selection
keys (p.83). This would allow you to use the cursor keys or numeric keys to
operate the TV (this function may not be available on some TV models).

1

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find your TV’s remote control code.

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.

2

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control

En

82

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

SOURCE z
CODE SET
SOURCE/RECEIVER

Registering the remote control codes for
playback devices

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

Input selection keys

AV

B
ZONE

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

TUNING

• (RX-V473 only)
If you assign the remote control code for an external device to the star (★ or ★★)
key, you can operate the device with the remote control without switching the input
source after pressing the star key.

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

You can use the unit’s remote control to operate playback devices if
you have registered their remote control codes. You can also use
the input selection keys to change the playback devices that are
controlled by the remote control, because their remote control
codes are assigned to the input selection keys.

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

1

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

Menu operation keys

Use “Remote Control Code Search” in the CD-ROM
to find the remote control code for your playback
device.

■ Playback device operations
Once you have registered the remote control code for your
playback device, you can control it using the following keys after
selecting the input source or scene.

• By pressing SOURCE/RECEIVER, you can switch the devices (the unit or
external device) that are operated by the menu operation keys, DISPLAY and
numeric keys. You can operate the unit when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in
orange, and an external device when SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.
For example, if you register the remote control code of your external device on
TUNER, you can operate the unit’s built-in FM/AM radio when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in orange, and the external device when
SOURCE/RECEIVER lights up in green.

SOURCE z
Menu operation
keys

Turns on/off the playback device.
Cursor keys

Select an item.

ENTER

Confirms a selected item.

RETURN
DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

4

External device
operation keys
DISPLAY

• If there are multiple remote control codes, register the first code in the list. If
that does not work, try the other codes.

8

Numeric keys

2

ENT

TV operation keys
TV VOL

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

TV
INPUT

Switches information on the display.

MUTE

MODE

1

Returns to the previous screen.

DISPLAY
D

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 2.

TV CH

MUTE

3
4

External device
operation keys

TOP MENU

Displays the top menu.

POP-UP
MENU

Displays the pop-up menu.

s

Stops playback.

d

Stops playback temporarily.

a

Starts playback of the selected
song/video.

h
j

Press the input selection key.

f

For example, press HDMI 1 to set the remote control code
for the playback device connected to the HDMI 1 jack.

g

Use the numeric keys to enter the 4-digit remote
control code.

Once the remote control code is registered successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.
If it blinks six times, registration has failed. Repeat from Step 2.

Searches forward/backward (by
holding down).
Skips forward/backward.

Numeric keys

Enter numerical values.

TV operation keys

Control the TV (p.82).

• These keys work only if the corresponding function is available on your playback
device and if the device can be operated with an infrared remote control.

• For details on how to register a remote control code to a SCENE key, refer to
“Configuring scene assignments” (p.35).

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control

En

83

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

CODE SET
SOURCE/RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

B

Input selection keys

AV

Resetting remote control codes
You can reset a remote control code registered to each input
selection key.

1

ZONE

SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

TUNER

FM

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

Perform each of the following steps within 1 minute.
Otherwise, the setting will be canceled. If this happens,
repeat from Step 1.

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

DIRECT

2
3

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

POP-UP
MENU

Press the input selection key.
Use the numeric keys to enter “5098”.

Once the remote control code is reset successfully,
SOURCE/RECEIVER blinks twice.

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the
tip of a ballpoint pen.

MUTE

If it blinks six times, resetting has failed. Repeat from Step 1.

MODE

To reset the remote control to factory default settings
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

ENT

a Press CODE SET using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen.
Numeric keys

b Press SOURCE/RECEIVER.
c Use the numeric keys to enter “9981”.

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

TV CH

MUTE

CONFIGURATIONS

➤ Controlling external devices with the remote control

En

84

Updating the unit’s firmware

CODE SET

SOURCE RECEIVER

New firmware that provides additional features or product
improvements will be released as needed. If the unit is connected
to the Internet, you can download the firmware via the network and
update it.

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

AV

1

Note

TUNER

AM

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

• Do not operate the unit or disconnect the power cable or network cable during
firmware update. Firmware update takes about 20 minutes or more
(depending on your Internet connection speed).

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

ENHANCER

• To perform the following procedure, your TV must be connected to the unit via
HDMI. If not, perform the update from the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81).

DIRECT

Use the cursor keys to select “Perform Update” and
press ENTER.
The on-screen display turns off and the firmware update
starts.

B
ZONE

FM

4
5

If “UPDATE SUCCESS PLEASE POWER OFF!”
appears on the front display, press z (power) on the
front panel.

SLEEP

The firmware update is complete.

SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

SETUP

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

1

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10
TV

INPUT
TV VOL
MUTE

Cursor keys
ENTER

• You can also update the firmware using the USB memory device from the
“ADVANCED SETUP” menu (p.81).

1
2

Press SETUP.

3

Use the cursor keys to select “Network Update” and
press ENTER.

4

8

ENT

Use the cursor keys to select “Network” and press
ENTER.

TV CH

If new firmware is available, the envelope icon (p) appears
in the “Network Update” screen.

Network Update

p

Icon

Perform Update
Firmware Version
System ID

x.xx
xxxxxxxx

Update:ENTER
Back:RETURN

• To cancel the operation without updating the firmware, press SETUP.

CONFIGURATIONS ➤ Updating the unit’s firmware

En

85

APPENDIX
Frequently asked questions
The new speaker system does not provide an ideal sound
balance...

I want to display a device name or a manufacture name on the
front display when selecting an input source...

If you have changed speakers or have a new speaker system, use YPAO to optimize
the speaker settings again (p.30). If you want to adjust the speaker settings manually,
use “Speaker” in the “Setup” menu (p.69).

By default, input source names (such as “HDMI 1” and “AV 1”) are displayed on the
front display when an input source is selected. If you want to rename them as you like,
use “Input Rename” (p.76) in the “Setup” menu. You can also select a name from the
presets (such as “Blu-ray” and “DVD”).

Since we have small children, we want to set limitations on the
volume control...
If a small child accidentally operates the controls on the main unit or remote control, the
volume may suddenly increase. This may also cause injury or damage the unit or
speakers. We recommend using “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the maximum
volume level for the unit in advance (p.75).

I am occasionally startled by a sudden loud sound when turning
on the unit...
By default, the volume level when the unit last entered standby mode is automatically
applied. If you want to fix the volume, use “Initial Volume” in the “Setup” menu to set the
volume to be applied when the receiver is turned on (p.75).

I want to prevent accidental changes to the settings...
You can protect the settings configured on the unit (such as speaker settings) by
utilizing “Memory Guard” in the “Setup” menu (p.77).

The unit’s remote control is simultaneously controlling another
Yamaha product as well as the unit...
When using multiple Yamaha products, the remote control may work on another
Yamaha product or another remote control may work on the unit. If this happens,
register different remote control IDs for the devices that you want to control with each
remote control (p.80).

I made HDMI connections but HDMI Control does not work at
all...
To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the HDMI Control link setup (p.96). After
connecting HDMI Control-compatible devices (such as BD/DVD players) to the unit,
enable HDMI Control on each device and perform the HDMI Control link setup. This
setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your
system. For information on how HDMI Control works between your TV and playback
devices, refer to the instruction manuals for each device.

APPENDIX

➤ Frequently asked questions

En

86

Troubleshooting
Refer to the table below when the unit does not function properly.
If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instructions below do not help, turn off the unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.

First, check the following:
a The power cables of the unit, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are connected to AC wall outlets
securely.
b The unit, subwoofer, TV and playback devices (such as BD/DVD players) are turned on.
c The connectors of each cable are securely inserted in to jacks on each device.

Power and system
Problem

Cause

Remedy

The power does not turn on.

The protection circuitry has been activated three times
consecutively. If the unit is in this condition, the standby indicator
on the unit blinks when you try to turn on the power.

As a safety precaution, capability to turn on the power is disabled. Contact your
nearest Yamaha dealer or service center to request repair.

The power does not turn off.

The internal microcomputer has frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit.

The power turns off (standby mode) immediately.

The unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).

The sleep timer worked.

Turn on the unit and start playback again.

The auto-standby function kicked in because the unit was not used
for the specified time.

To disable the auto-standby function, set “Auto Power Down” in the “Setup” menu
to “Off” (p.75).

The unit enters
standby mode automatically.

The unit is not reacting.

The speaker impedance setting is incorrect.

Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers (p.80).

The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short
circuit.

Twist the bare wires of each speaker cable firmly and reconnect to the unit and
speakers (p.16).

The internal microcomputer is frozen, due to an external electric
shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or to a drop
in the power supply voltage.

Hold down z (power) on the front panel for more than 10 seconds to initialize
and reboot the unit.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

En

87

Audio
Problem

No sound.

The volume cannot be increased.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker.

(RX-V573 only)
No sound is coming from the surround back
speaker.

No sound is coming from the subwoofer.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Signals that the unit cannot reproduce are being input.

Some digital audio formats cannot be played back on the unit. To check the audio
format of the input signal, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64).

(RX-V573 only)
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.

Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The maximum volume is set.

Use “Max Volume” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the maximum volume (p.75).

A device connected to the output jacks of the unit is not turned on.
(This may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the output jacks of the unit.

The playback source does not contain a signal for the channel.

To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64).

The currently selected sound program/decoder does not use the
speaker.

To check it, use “Test Tone” in the “Setup” menu (p.71).

Audio output of the speaker is disabled.

Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Configuration” in the “Setup” menu to change the
speaker settings (p.69).

The volume of the speaker is set too low.

Perform YPAO (p.30) or use “Level” in the “Setup” menu to adjust the speaker
volume (p.71).

(RX-V573 only)
Audio output to Zone A (or Zone B) is disabled.

Press ZONE A (ZONE B) to enable audio output to Zone A (or Zone B).

The speaker cable connecting the unit and the speaker is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another speaker cable.

The speaker is malfunctioning.

To check it, replace with another speaker. If the problem persists, the unit may be
malfunctioning.

The extended surround is disabled.

Use “Extended Surround” in the “Option” menu to select a decoder to be used
(p.63).

“Power Amp Assign” is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”.

When “Power Amp Assign” in the “Setup” menu is set to “BI-AMP” or “ZoneB”,
you cannot use the surround back speakers. To use the surround back speakers,
set “Power Amp Assign” to “Basic” (p.69).

The playback source does not contain LFE or low-frequency
signals.

To check it, set “Extra Bass” in the “Setup” menu to “On”, in order to output the
front channel low-frequency components from the subwoofer (p.70).

Subwoofer output is disabled.

Perform YPAO (p.30) or set “Subwoofer” in the “Setup” menu to “Use” (p.69).

The volume of the subwoofer is too low.

Adjust the volume on the subwoofer.

The subwoofer has been turned off by its auto-standby function.

Disable the auto-standby function of the subwoofer or adjust its sensitivity level.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

En

88

Problem

No sound from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

No sound from the TV (when HDMI Control is
used).

Only the front speakers work on multichannel
audio.

Cause

Remedy

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The unit is set not to output audio input through HDMI jacks from
the SPEAKERS terminals.

In “Audio Output” in the “Setup” menu, set “Amp” to “On” (p.72).

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack exceeds
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

The TV is set to output audio from the TV speakers.

Change the audio output setting on your TV so that the TV audio is output from the
speakers connected to the unit.

(If the TV is connected to the unit with an audio cable)
The TV audio input setting does not match the actual connection.

Use “TV Audio Input” in the “Setup” menu to select the correct audio input jack
(p.72).

(If you are trying to use ARC)
ARC is disabled on the unit or TV.

Set “ARC” in the “Setup” menu to “On” (p.73). Also, enable ARC on the TV.

The playback device is set to output 2-channel audio (such as
PCM) only.

To check it, use “Signal Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). If necessary, change
the digital audio output setting on the playback device.

The unit is too close to another digital or radio frequency device.

Move the unit further away from the device.

The cable connecting the unit and playback device is defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The volume of the unit is too high.

Turn down the volume. If “ECO Mode” is set to “On”, set it to “Off” (p.76).

A device connected to the unit’s output jacks is not turned on. (This
may happen due to the nature of AV receivers.)

Turn on all devices connected to the unit’s output jacks.

Cause

Remedy

Another input source is selected on the unit.

Select an appropriate input source with the input selection keys.

Noise/hum is heard.

The sound is distorted.

Video
Problem

No video.

No video from the playback device (connected to
the unit with HDMI).

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.

The video signal output from the unit is not supported by the TV.

Check the video output setting of the playback device. For information about
video signals supported by the TV, refer to the instruction manuals for the TV.

The cable connecting the unit and TV (or playback device) is
defective.

If there is no problem with the connection, replace with another cable.

The input video signal (resolution) is not supported by the unit.

To check the information about the current video signal (resolution), use “Signal
Info” in the “Option” menu (p.64). For information about video signals supported
by the unit, see “HDMI signal compatibility” (p.98).

The TV does not support HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection).

Refer to the instruction manuals for the TV and check the TV’s specifications.

The number of devices connected to the HDMI OUT jack is over
the limit.

Disconnect some of the HDMI devices.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

En

89

Problem

Cause

Remedy

The TV is not connected to the unit via HDMI.

You can display the menu of the unit on the TV only when they are connected with
an HDMI cable. If necessary, use an HDMI cable to connect them (p.18 to 21).

Another input source is selected on the TV.

Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit (HDMI OUT jack).

Cause

Remedy

The menu of the unit is not displayed on the TV.

FM/AM radio
Problem

There is multi-path interference.
FM radio reception is weak or noisy.

AM radio reception is weak or noisy.

Adjust the FM antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location.
Press MODE to select monaural FM radio reception (p.42).

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor FM antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.

The noises may be caused by fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats, or other electrical equipment.

It is difficult to completely eliminate noise. It may be reduced by using an outdoor
AM antenna.
Select the station manually (p.42).

Your area is too far from the FM station transmitter.

Use an outdoor antenna. We recommend using a sensitive multi-element
antenna.
Adjust the AM antenna orientation.

Radio stations cannot be selected automatically.
The AM radio signal is weak.

Select the station manually (p.42).
Use an outdoor AM antenna. Connect it to the ANTENNA (AM) jack together with
the supplied AM antenna.

AM radio stations cannot be registered as
presets.

Auto Preset has been used.

Auto Preset is for registering FM radio stations only. Register AM radio stations
manually (p.43).

Cause

Remedy

The USB device is not connected to the USB jack securely.

Turn off the unit, reconnect your USB device, and turn the unit on again.

USB and network
Problem
The unit does not detect the USB device.
The file system of the USB device is not FAT16 or FAT32.

Use a USB device with FAT16 or FAT32 format.

Folders and files in the USB device cannot be
viewed.

The data in the USB device is protected by the encryption.

Use a USB device without an encryption function.

The network feature does not function.

The network parameters (IP address) have not been obtained
properly.

Enable the DHCP server function on your router and set “DHCP” in the “Setup”
menu to “On” on the unit (p.77). If you want to configure the network parameters
manually, check that you are using an IP address which is not used by other
network devices in your network (p.77).

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

En

90

Problem

The unit does not detect the PC.

The files in the PC cannot be viewed or played
back.

The Internet radio cannot be played.

Cause

Remedy

The media sharing setting is not correct.

Configure the sharing setting and select the unit as a device to which music
contents are shared (p.53).

Some security software installed on your PC is blocking the access
of the unit to your PC.

Check the settings of security software installed on your PC.

The unit and PC are not in the same network.

Check the network connections and your router settings, and then connect the
unit and the PC to the same network.

The files are not supported by the unit or the media server.

Use the file format supported by both the unit and the media server. For
information about the file formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music
stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53).

The selected Internet radio station is currently not available.

There may be a network problem at the radio station, or the service may have
been stopped. Try the station later or select another station.

The selected Internet radio station is currently broadcasting
silence.

Some Internet radio stations broadcast silence at certain of times of the day. Try
the station later or select another station.

Access to the network is restricted by the firewall settings of your
network devices (such as the router).

Check the firewall settings of your network devices. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station.
The port number varies depending on the radio station.

Cause

Remedy

The unit is out of the operating range.

Use the remote control within the operating range (p.4).

The batteries are weak.

Replace with new batteries.

The unit’s remote control sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or
strong lighting.

Adjust the lighting angle, or reposition the unit.

The remote control is set to control external devices.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control the unit (the key
lights up in orange).

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80).

The remote control is set to control the unit.

Press SOURCE/RECEIVER to set the remote control to control external devices
(the key lights up in green).

The corresponding remote control code is not set properly.

Set the remote control code again (p.82). Even if the remote control code is
registered properly, some products may not respond to the remote control.

Remote control
Problem

The unit cannot be controlled using the remote
control.

External devices cannot be controlled using the
remote control.

APPENDIX ➤ Troubleshooting

En

91

Error indications on the front display
Message

Cause

Remedy

Access denied

Access to the PC is denied.

Configure the sharing settings and select the unit as a device to which music contents are shared
(p.53).

The unit cannot access the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

The unit cannot access the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and turn it on again.

Access error
Make sure your router and modem are turned on.
There is a problem with the signal path from the network to the unit.
Check the connection between the unit and your router (or hub) (p.27).
Check SP Wires

The speaker cables short circuit.

Connect error

The unit has detected the iPod, but cannot access it.

Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Internal Error

An internal error has occurred.

Contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center.

No content

Twist the bare wires of the cables firmly and connect to the unit and speakers properly.

There are no playable files in the selected folder.

Select a folder that contains files supported by the unit.

The unit cannot detect the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

No device
The unit cannot detect the iPod.

Turn off the iPod and then turn it on again.

Please wait

The unit is preparing for connecting to the network.

Wait until the message disappears. If the message stays more than 3 minutes, turn off the unit and turn
it on again.

RemID Mismatch

The remote control IDs of the unit and the remote control are not
identical.

Change the remote control ID of the unit or the remote control (p.80).

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the iPod for some
reason.

Check the song data. If it cannot be played on the iPod itself, the song data or storage area may be
defective.

The unit cannot play back the songs stored on the PC for some
reason.

Check if the format of files you are trying to play is supported by the unit. For information about the
formats supported by the unit, see “Playing back music stored on media servers (PCs/NAS)” (p.53). If
the unit supports the file format, but still cannot play back any files, the network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic.

Unknown iPod

The connected iPod is not supported by the unit.

Use an iPod supported by the unit (p.46).

USB Overloaded

An overcurrent is flowing through the USB device.

Turn off the unit and reconnect your USB device. If the problem persists, try another USB device.

Unable to play

APPENDIX ➤

Error indications on the front display

En

92

Glossary
Audio information
■ Audio decoding format
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with Dolby
Digital Surround EX. This decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound.

Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is a compressed digital audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel audio. Dolby Digital Plus remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems
that support Dolby Digital. This technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II enables 5-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are three modes available:
“Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources, and “Game mode” for game sources.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx

DTS Express
DTS Express is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel audio and allows a higher
compression rate than the DTS Digital Surround format developed by DTS, Inc. This technology is
developed for audio streaming services on the Internet and secondary audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
7.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital Surround. This technology is used for audio on
BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio format developed to offer a high-definition home
theater experience with the quality of the studio master by DTS, Inc. DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

DTS Neo:6
DTS Neo:6 enables 6-channel playback from 2-channel sources. There are two modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. This technology provides discrete
full-bandwidth matrix channels of surround sound.

DSD (Direct Stream Digital)

Dolby Pro Logic IIx enables 7-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There are three
modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources (for 2-channel sources only).

DSD (Direct Stream Digital) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as SACD (Super
Audio CDs). The signals are stored at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz. The highest
frequency response is equal to or higher than 100 kHz, with a dynamic range of 120 dB. This technology
offers better audio quality than that used for CDs.

Dolby TrueHD

FLAC

Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio format developed by Dolby Laboratories, Inc. to offer a
high-definition home theater experience with the quality of the studio master. Dolby TrueHD can carry up to
eight channels of 96 kHz/24-bit audio (up to six channels of 192 kHz/24-bit audio) simultaneously. This
technology is used for audio on BD (Blu-ray discs).

FLAC is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is inferior to lossy compressed audio
formats in compression rate but provides higher audio quality.

DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 is a compressed digital audio format that supports 5.1-channel and 96 kHz/24-bit audio. This
format remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that support DTS Digital
Surround. This technology is used for music DVDs, etc.

DTS Digital Surround
DTS Digital Surround is a compressed digital audio format developed by DTS, Inc. that supports
5.1-channel audio. This technology is used for audio on most DVD discs.

DTS-ES
DTS-ES creates total 6.1-channel audio from 5.1-channel sources that are recorded with DTS-ES. This
decoder adds a surround back sound to the original 5.1-channel sound. In the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 format, a
surround back sound is recorded in the surround channels, and in the DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 format, a
discrete surround back channel is recorded.

MP3
One of the compressed digital audio format used by MPEG. With psychoacoustic technologies, this
compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of compressing data
quantity by about 1/10 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. It is used for mobile telephones, portable audio players, and audio streaming
services on Internet because it allows a high compression rate of data while maintaining better audio quality
than MP3.

PCM (Pulse Code Modulation)
PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded, and transmitted. This
technology is the basis of all other audio format. This technology is used as a lossless audio format called
Linear PCM for audio on a variety of media, including CDs and BD (Blu-ray discs).

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary

En

93

Sampling frequency/Quantization bit
Sampling frequency and quantization bits indicate the quantity of information when an analog audio signal
is digitized. These values are noted as in the following example: “48 kHz/24-bit”.
• Sampling frequency
Sampling frequency (the number of times the signal is sampled per second) is called the sampling rate.
When the sampling frequency is higher, the range of frequencies that can be played back are wider.
• Quantization bit
The number of quantization bits indicate the degree of accuracy when converting the sound level into a
numeric value. When the number of quantized bits is higher, the expression of the sound level is more
accurate.

WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. By default, the PCM method (no compression) is used, but you can also use other
compression methods.

WMA (Windows Media Audio)
One of the compressed digital audio formats developed by Microsoft Corporation. With psychoacoustic
technologies, this compression method achieves a high compression rate. Reportedly, it is capable of
compressing data quantity by about 1/20 maintaining a certain level of audio quality.

■ Others
Bi-amplification connection (Bi-amp)
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. When you use the bi-amplification
connection, the unit drives the tweeter and woofer in a speaker with the discrete amplifiers. As a
consequence, the tweeter and woofer provide clear audio signal without the interference.

LFE (Low Frequency Effects) 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency bass signals and has a frequency range from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This
channel is added to the channels for all bands with Dolby Digital or DTS to enhance low frequency audio
effects. This channel is labeled 0.1 because it is limited to only low frequency audio.

HDMI and video information
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for luminance and
the Pb and Pr signals for chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because
each of these signals is independent.

Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, color, brightness, and synchronization data signals are combined
and transmitted with a single cable.

Deep Color
Deep Color is a technology that HDMI specification supports. Deep Color increases the number of available
colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Conventional color systems
process the color using 8 bits. Deep Color processes the color with 10, 12, or 16 bits. This technology
allows HDTVs and other displays to increase from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate
on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors.

HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the world-wide standard interface for digital audio/video
signal transmission. This interface transmits both digital audio and digital video signals using a single cable
without any loss. HDMI complies with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and provides a
secure audio/video interface. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.

x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a technology that the HDMI specification supports. It is a more extensive color space than
sRGB and allows the expression of colors that were not hitherto possible. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space, and thus can produce more vivid,
natural images.

Lip sync
Video output sometimes lags behind audio output due to the complexity of signal processing caused by an
increase in video signal capacity. Lip sync is a technique for automatically correcting the timing lag
between audio and video output.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary

En

94

Yamaha technologies
CINEMA DSP (Digital Sound Field Processor)
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is
best experienced in a theater that has many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions
(such as room size, wall material, and number of speakers) can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are
differences in the sound that you hear. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, CINEMA DSP,
Yamaha’s original DSP technology provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in your own
home.

CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D mode achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the
accurate and intensive 3D sound fields in a listening room.

Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature compensates for missing harmonics in compression music
formats (such as MP3). As a result, this technology provides improved performance for the overall sound
system.

SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound program, so that accurate representations of all the sound
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.

Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows the system to virtually reproduce the sound field of the surround speakers with
front left and right speakers. Even if the surround speakers are not connected, the unit creates the realistic
sound field in a listening room.

APPENDIX ➤ Glossary

En

95

Video signal flow

Information on HDMI

Video signals input from a video device to the unit are output to a TV as shown below.
Video device

The unit

TV

HDMI Control
HDMI Control allows you to operate external devices via HDMI. If you connect a TV that
supports HDMI Control to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can control the unit (such as
power and volume) with TV remote control operations. You can also control playback
devices (such as HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players) connected to the unit with
an HDMI cable.
For details on connections, see “Connecting a TV” (p.18) and “Connecting video
devices (such as BD/DVD players)” (p.23).
Operations available from the TV’s remote control

HDMI in
HDMI

• Standby synchronization

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

• Volume control including mute
• Switching to input audio from the TV when the TV input is switched to its built-in tuner
• Switching to input video/audio from the selected playback device
• Switching between audio output devices (the unit or TV speaker)
(Example)
HDMI Control

HDMI Control
COMPONENT VIDEO
in
COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO
out
COMPONENT
VIDEO

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PR

PR

PB

PB

PB

PB

Y

Y

Y

Y

Playback device
also turns off

The unit turns off
(standby)
Turn off the TV

Operations available from the unit’s remote control
• Starting playback on the playback device and turning on the TV with a scene
selection (p.35)

VIDEO

VIDEO in

VIDEO out

VIDEO

VIDEO

• Switching the TV input to display the “Setup” menu (when SETUP is pressed)
VIDEO

• Controlling the playback device (playback and menu operations) without registering
remote control codes (p.83)

APPENDIX

➤ Information on HDMI

En

96

(Example)

7
HDMI Control

HDMI Control

Turns on and displays
video from the playback
device

Playback starts

Press SCENE (BD/DVD)

To use HDMI Control, you need to perform the following HDMI Control link setup after
connecting the TV and playback devices.

Check that the unit is properly synchronized with the TV by turning
off the TV or adjusting the TV volume with the TV remote control.

• If HDMI Control does not work properly, try unplugging the TV in Step 2 and plugging in the TV again in
Step 3. It may solve the problem. Also, HDMI Control may not work if the number of connected devices
exceeds the limit. In this case, disable HDMI Control on the devices not in use.
• If the unit is not synchronized to the TV’s power operations, check the priority of the audio output setting on
the TV.
• We recommend using TV and playback devices from the same manufacturer so that HDMI Control works
more effectively.

• This setup is required every time you add a new HDMI Control-compatible device to your system.

1
2

Turn on the unit, TV, and playback devices.
Enable HDMI Control on the unit, TV, and playback devices (such as
HDMI Control-compatible BD/DVD players).
To enable HDMI Control on the unit, set “HDMI Control” (p.72) in the “Setup”
menu to “On” and configure the related items (“TV Audio Input”, “Standby
Sync”, “ARC”, and “SCENE”).

3

Turn off the main power of the TV and then turn off the unit and
playback devices.

4
5
6

Turn on the unit and playback devices and then turn on the TV.
Switch the TV input to display the video from the unit.
Check the followings.
On the unit: The input to which the playback device is connected is selected.
If not, select the input source manually.
On the TV: The video from the playback device is displayed.

APPENDIX

➤ Information on HDMI

En

97

HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal type

Audio signal format

Compatible media (example)

2ch Linear PCM

2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio

Multichannel Linear PCM

8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit

DVD-Audio, BD (Blu-ray disc),
HD DVD

DSD

2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit

SACD

Bitstream

Dolby Digital, DTS

DVD-Video

Bitstream
(High definition audio)

Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus,
DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD
BD (Blu-ray disc), HD DVD
High Resolution Audio, DTS
Express

Video signals
The unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• VGA

• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 480i/60 Hz

• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• 576i/50 Hz

• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

• 480p/60 Hz

• 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz (4K signals)

• 576p/50 Hz

• 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz (4K signals)

• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video/audio signals may not be output, depending
on the type of the DVD player.
• The unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI devices. For details, refer to the instruction
manual for each device.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on the unit, set the input source device appropriately so that the device
outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the playback device).
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the playback device.

APPENDIX

➤ Information on HDMI

En

98

Reference diagram (rear panel)

HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

(BD/DVD)

NETWORK

ARC

ANTENNA
AM

FM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

PR

PR

PB

PB

SPEAKERS
FRONT

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

Y
VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

(RX-V573 U.S.A. model)

• The area around the video/audio output jacks is marked in white on the actual product to prevent improper connections.

APPENDIX

➤ Reference diagram (rear panel)

En

99

Trademarks

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

(For RX-V473)
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

(For RX-V573)
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent Nos: 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872;
7,333,929; 7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS-HD, the
Symbol, & DTS-HD and the Symbol together are registered trademarks & DTS-HD Master Audio is a
trademark of DTS, Inc.
Product includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

This receiver supports network connections.

“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.

x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
“Made for iPod,” “Made for iPhone,” and “Made for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory
standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless performance.
AirPlay, the AirPlay logo, iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod nano, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.

DLNA™ and DLNA CERTIFIED™ are trademarks or registered trademarks of Digital Living Network
Alliance. All rights reserved. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

Windows®
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect and Windows
Media Player are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.

APPENDIX

➤ Trademarks

En

100

Specifications
Input jacks
• Analog Audio
Audio x 4 (AV 5–6, AUDIO, V-AUX [Mini Jack])
• Digital Audio (Supported frequencies: 32 kHz to 96 kHz)
Optical x 2 (AV 1, AV 4)
Coaxial x 2 (AV 2–3)
• Video

• HDMI Output
HDMI OUT x 1

USB
• Capable of iPod, Mass Storage Class USB Memory

HDMI

• Current Supply Capacity: 2.1 A

• HDMI Specification: Deep Color, “x.v.Color,” Auto Lip Sync,

Network

ARC (Audio Return Channel), 3D, 4K

• PC Client Function
• Video Format (Repeater Mode)
- VGA

• Compatible with DLNA ver. 1.5

Composite x 5 (AV 3–6, V-AUX)

- 480i/60 Hz

• AirPlay supported

Component x 2 (AV 1–2)

- 576i/50 Hz

• Internet Radio

• HDMI Input
HDMI x 4 (HDMI 1–4)
• Other
USB x 1 (USB2.0)
NETWORK x 1 (100Base-TX)

Output jacks
• Analog Audio

- 480p/60 Hz
- 576p/50 Hz

Compatible Decoding Formats

- 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz

• Decoding Format

- 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz

- Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus

- 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz

- Dolby Digital EX

- 3840 x 2160p/30 Hz, 25 Hz, 24 Hz

- Dolby Digital

- 4096 x 2160p/24 Hz

- DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,

• Audio Format

[RX-V573]

- Dolby TrueHD

- Speaker Out x 7 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R,

- Dolby Digital Plus

DTS Express
- DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
- DTS Digital Surround

SURROUND BACK L/R*)

- Dolby Digital

* Note: assignment is possible. [SURROUND BACK,

- DTS-HD Master Audio

[RX-V573]

- DTS-HD High Resolution Audio

- Dolby Pro Logic

- Subwoofer Out x 1

- DTS Express

- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby

- AV OUT x 1

- DTS

- Headphone x 1

- DSD 6-ch

[RX-V473]

- PCM 2-ch to 8-ch (Max. 192 kHz/24-bit)

BI-AMP (FRONT L/R), ZONE B]

- Speaker Out x 5 (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R)

• Content Protection: HDCP compatible

- Subwoofer Out x 1
- AV OUT x 1
- Headphone x 1
• Video

• Post Decoding Format

Pro Logic II Game
- Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music, Dolby Pro Logic IIx Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic IIx Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema
[RX-V473]

• Link Function: CEC supported

TUNER
• Analog Tuner

MONITOR OUT

[U.K. and Europe models]

- Component x 1

FM/AM with Radio Data System x 1 (TUNER)

- Composite x 1

[Other models]

AV OUT

FM/AM x 1 (TUNER)

- Dolby Pro Logic
- Dolby Pro Logic II Music, Dolby Pro Logic II Movie, Dolby
Pro Logic II Game
- DTS Neo:6 Music, DTS Neo:6 Cinema

- Composite x 1

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications

En

101

Audio Section
• Rated Output Power (2-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 8 Ω)
[Other models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.09% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................80 W+80 W
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................95 W+95 W
Center ............................................................................... 95 W
Surround L/R...........................................................95 W+95 W
Surround Back L/R [RX-V573] ............................... 95 W+95 W
• Rated Output Power (1-channel driven)
[U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
[Other models] (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω)
Front L/R .................................................................... 115 W/ch

• Output Level / Output Impedance
AV OUT.............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER........................................................... 1 V/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output / Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................. 100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV 5 etc. to Front (10 Hz to 100 kHz) ..........................+0/-3 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
AV 5 etc. (Input Shorted 250 mV, Speaker Out)
......................................................................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R (Speaker Out) ..................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation

Center ....................................................................... 115 W/ch

AV 5 etc. (Input 5.1 kΩ Shorted, 1 kHz/10 kHz)

Surround L/R.............................................................. 115 W/ch

................................................................ 60 dB/45 dB or more

Surround Back L/R [RX-V573] ................................... 115 W/ch
• Maximum Effective Output Power (JEITA, 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω)
[China, Korea, Asia and General models]
Front L/R .................................................................... 135 W/ch

• Volume Control
Range............................................. MUTE, -80 dB to +16.5 dB
Step ................................................................................ 0.5 dB
• Tone Control Characteristics

Center ........................................................................ 135 W/ch

Bass Boost/Cut............................. ±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 50 Hz

Surround L/R.............................................................. 135 W/ch

Bass Turnover ............................................................... 350 Hz

Surround Back L/R [RX-V573] ................................... 135 W/ch

Treble Boost/Cut..........................±6 dB/0.5 dB Step at 20 kHz

• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]

Treble Turnover..............................................................3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics

Front L/R (8/6/4 Ω) ............................................ 110/130/160 W

(fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)

[Other models]

H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround)................................ 12 dB/oct.

Front L/R (6/4 Ω) ...................................................... 110/130 W

H.P.F. (Surround Back [RX-V573])............................ 12 dB/oct.

• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω .................................................................................. 0.2 dB
• Damping Factor
Front L/R, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω............................. 120 or more
• Input Sensitivity / Input Impedance
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 100 W/8 Ω)..............................200 mV/47 kΩ

L.P.F. (Subwoofer)..................................................... 24 dB/oct.

Video Section
• Video Signal Type
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ................NTSC
[Other models] ....................................................................PAL
• Video Signal Level
Composite..............................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component
Y ..........................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Pb/Pr ................................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Video Maximum Input Level........................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Video Signal to Noise Ratio................................ 50 dB or more
• Monitor Out Frequency Response
Component ............................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, -3 dB

FM Section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models]
...................................... 87.5/87.50 MHz to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ................................ 87.50 MHz to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quiet Sensitivity (IHF, 1 kHz, 100% MOD.)
Mono ................................................................. 3 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono ................................................................................71 dB
Stereo...............................................................................69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (IHF, 1 kHz)
Mono ................................................................................. 0.3%
Stereo................................................................................ 0.5%
• Antenna Input................................................ 75 Ω unbalanced

AM section
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models].......................... 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ......530/531 kHz to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .........................................531 kHz to 1611 kHz

• Maximum Input Signal
AV 5 etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD, Effect On) ........................... 2.3 V

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications

En

102

General
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ......................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model]............. AC110 to 120/220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ................................................. AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model]................................................. AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................ AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models].............................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] .................................... AC220 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................. 270 W/320 VA
[Other models]................................................................ 280 W
• Standby Power Consumption
HDMI Control Off, Standby Through Off...............0.1 W or less
HDMI Control On, Standby Through On (No Signals)
...........................................................................1.0 W (Typical)
Network Standby On .........................................2.0 W (Typical)
• Dimensions (W x H x D)
...................... 435 x 161 x 315 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/8” x 12-3/8”)
• Weight
[RX-V573] ....................................................... 8.2 kg (18.1 lbs)
[RX-V473] ....................................................... 8.1 kg (17.9 lbs)

* Specifications are subject to change without notice.

APPENDIX ➤ Specifications

En

103

Index
Symbols
★/★★ keys ................................................10
Envelope icon (p) ....................................85
Lock icon (o) ...........................................77

Numerics
2.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................14
2ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38
3.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................14
4.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
4K signal (Video resolution) ......................98
5.1-channel system
(Speaker connection) ............................15
5.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
5ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38
6.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
7.1-channel system
(Speaker connection) ............................15
7.1-channel system
(Speaker placement) ............................13
7ch Stereo (Sound program) ....................38

A
A.DRC (Option menu) ...............................63
Action Game (Sound program) .................37
Adaptive DRC (Option menu) ...................63
Adjustment (Setup menu, Lipsync) ...........74
ADVANCED SETUP ..................................80
AirPlay .......................................................58
AM antenna ...............................................26

ARC .......................................................... 18
ARC (Setup menu, HDMI) ........................ 73
ARC-compatible TV (Connection) ............ 18
Audio Decoder (Front display) ................. 34
Audio device connection ......................... 25
Audio In (Option menu) ...................... 25, 65
AUDIO jack .............................................. 17
Audio Output (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72
Audio Return Channel .............................. 18
Auto Power Down (Setup menu, ECO) .... 75
Auto Preset (FM radio) ............................. 43
Automatic preset (FM radio) .................... 43
AV OUT jack ............................................. 28

B
B RATE (Signal information) ..................... 64
Banana plug ............................................. 16
Bass (Option menu) ................................. 63
Battery ........................................................ 4
BI-AMP (Setup menu) .............................. 69
Bi-amp speaker connections ................... 16
Bi-amplification connection ...................... 94
Bitrate (Signal information) ....................... 64

C
CAT-5 (Network cable) ............................. 27
Cellar Club (Sound program) ................... 38
Center (Setup menu, Speaker) ................ 69
Center Image
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74
Center Width
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 74
Chamber (Sound program) ...................... 38
CHAN (Signal information) ....................... 64
Channel (Signal information) .................... 64

Charge (iPod) ........................................... 46
CINEMA DSP ............................................ 37
CINEMA DSP 3D ...................................... 39
CINEMA DSP 3D Mode
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73
COAXIAL jack .......................................... 17
Combination of video/audio input jacks ... 24
Component video cable ........................... 17
Component video connection
(Playback devices) ............................... 23
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ....................... 17
Composite video connection
(Playback devices) ............................... 24
Compressed Music Enhancer .................. 41
Configuration (Scene function) ................ 35
Configuration (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72
Configuration (Setup menu, Speaker) ...... 69
Connection (Audio devices) ..................... 25
Connection (iPod) .................................... 46
Connection (NAS) .................................... 27
Connection (PC) ....................................... 27
Connection (Recording device) ............... 28
Connection (Speaker cables) .................. 16
Connection (Subwoofer) .......................... 16
Connection (USB storage device) ........... 50
Connection (Video devices) ..................... 23
Controlling external devices ..................... 82
Crossover (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 70
Crossover frequency setting
(Subwoofer) .......................................... 30
Crossover frequency setting (the unit) ..... 70

APPENDIX

➤ Index

En

104

D
Default Gateway
(Setup menu, IP Address) .....................77
DHCP (Setup menu, IP Address) ..............77
Digital coaxial cable ..................................17
Digital Media Controller ............................78
Digital optical cable ..................................17
Dimension
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ..............74
Dimmer (Setup menu, Function) ...............77
DIRECT (Sound mode) .............................40
Direct playback .........................................40
Distance (Setup menu, Speaker) ..............71
DLNA-compatible NAS .............................53
DMC (Digital Media Controller) .................78
DMC Control (Setup menu, Network) .......78
DNS Server (Setup menu, IP Address) .....77
Dolby Digital EX (Extended Surround) ......63
Dolby Pro Logic (Surround decoder) ........40
Dolby Pro Logic II (Surround decoder) .....40
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Surround decoder) ...40
Drama (Sound program) ...........................37
DSP Level (Option menu) .........................63
DSP Parameter (Setup menu, Sound) ......73
DSP Program (Front display) ....................34
DSP/Surround (Option menu) ...................63
DTS Neo: 6 (Surround decoder) ...............40
DTS-ES (Extended Surround) ...................63
Dynamic Range (Setup menu, Volume) ....75

E
ECO (Setup menu) ....................................75
ECO Mode (Setup menu, ECO) ................76
Enhancer (Option menu) ...........................64
ENHANCER (Sound mode) .......................41
EQ Select (Setup menu, Equalizer) ..........71
Equalizer (Setup menu, Speaker) .............71

Error indications on the front display ....... 92
Error message (YPAO) ............................. 32
EX/ES (Extended Surround) ..................... 63
EXTD (Option menu) ................................ 63
Extended Surround (Option menu) .......... 63
External device operation keys ................ 10
Extra Bass (Setup menu, Speaker) .......... 70

F
Firmware update ...................................... 85
Firmware version ...................................... 81
FM antenna .............................................. 26
FORMAT (Signal information) ................... 64
Format (Signal Information) ...................... 64
Frequency (FM/AM radio) ........................ 42
Frequency step setting (FM/AM radio) .... 42
Front (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 69
Front display (Part name and functions) .... 8
Front display information .......................... 34
Front panel (Part names and functions) ..... 7
Function (Setup menu) ............................. 76

G
GEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71

H
Hall in Munich (Sound program) .............. 38
Hall in Vienna (Sound program) ............... 38
HDMI (Setup menu) ................................. 72
HDMI cable .............................................. 17
HDMI connection (Playback devices) ...... 23
HDMI Control ........................................... 96
HDMI Control (Setup menu, HDMI) .......... 72
HDMI Control-compatible TV
(Connection) ........................................ 20
HDMI jack ................................................ 17
HDMI OUT (TV) (Setup menu, HDMI) ...... 72
Headphones .............................................. 7

High definition audio ................................ 98
High speed HDMI cable .......................... 17

I
Impedance (Speaker) .............................. 12
In.Trim (Option menu) .............................. 64
Indicators (Part name and functions) ......... 8
INFO key .................................................. 34
Information (Front display) ....................... 34
Information (Setup menu, Network) ......... 79
INIT (ADVANCED SETUP) ........................ 81
Initial Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ....... 75
Input (Front display) ................................. 34
Input (Signal information) ......................... 64
Input Rename (Setup menu, Volume) ...... 76
Input selection keys ................................. 10
Input Trim (Option menu) ......................... 64
Interlock (Option menu) ........................... 65
Internet radio ............................................ 56
IP Address (Setup menu, Network) .......... 77
iPad .......................................................... 46
iPhone ...................................................... 46
iPod .......................................................... 46
iTunes ....................................................... 58

L
Language ................................................. 29
Language (Setup menu) .......................... 29
Level (Setup menu, Speaker) ................... 71
LFE ........................................................... 94
Lipsync (Option menu) ............................. 64
Lipsync (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 74
Low Frequency Effects ............................. 94

M
MAC Address Filter
(Setup menu, Network) ........................ 78
Manual preset (FM/AM radio) .................. 43
APPENDIX

➤ Index

En

105

Manual speaker configuration
(Setup menu) ........................................69
Max Volume (Setup menu, Volume) ..........75
Media Sharing ...........................................53
MEMORY (FM/AM radio) ...........................43
Memory (FM/AM radio) .............................43
Memory Guard (Setup menu, Function) ...77
MODE key .................................................42
Monaural reception mode (FM radio) .......42
Mono Movie (Sound program) ..................37
MOVIE (Sound program category) ...........37
Multiple room playback .............................60
MUSIC (Sound program category) ...........38
Music Video (Sound program) ..................38
MUTE key ..................................................34
Muting .......................................................34

N
NAS ...........................................................53
Neo: 6 Cinema (Surround decoder) .........40
Neo: 6 Music (Surround decoder) ............40
NET RADIO (Input) ....................................56
Network (Setup menu) ..............................77
Network cable ...........................................27
Network information ..................................79
Network Name (Setup menu, Network) ....78
Network Standby
(Setup menu, Network) .........................78
Network Update
(Setup menu, Network) .........................79
NTSC (Video signal type) ..........................81

O
OPTICAL jack ............................................17
Optimizing the speaker settings
automatically .........................................30
OPTION key ..............................................62

Option menu ............................................ 62
Option menu item list ............................... 62
Output (Signal information) ...................... 64

P
PAL (Video signal type) ............................ 81
Panorama
(Setup menu, DSP Parameter) ............. 73
PC ............................................................ 53
PEQ (Setup menu, Equalizer) .................. 71
PHONES jack ............................................. 7
Placement (Speakers) .............................. 12
Playback (iPod) ........................................ 47
Playback (NAS) ........................................ 53
Playback (PC) .......................................... 53
Playback (Server) ..................................... 53
Playback (USB storage device) ............... 50
Playback device operations
(Remote control) .................................. 83
PLII Game (Surround decoder) ................ 40
PLII Movie (Surround decoder) ................ 40
PLII Music (Surround decoder) ................ 40
PLIIx Game (Surround decoder) .............. 40
PLIIx Mo (Extended Surround) ................. 63
PLIIx Movie (Extended Surround) ............ 63
PLIIx Movie (Surround decoder) .............. 40
PLIIx Mu (Extended Surround) ................. 63
PLIIx Music (Extended Surround) ............ 63
PLIIx Music (Surround decoder) .............. 40
Power Amp Assign
(Setup menu, Speaker) ........................ 69
Preparation (Zone B) ................................ 60
Preset (FM/AM radio) ............................... 43
Preset station select (FM/AM radio) ......... 44
Preset stations (FM/AM radio) .................. 43

R
Radio Data System ................................... 45
Rear panel (Part name and functions) ....... 9
Recording device connection .................. 28
Remote control
(Part name and functions) .................... 10
Remote control code for a TV .................. 82
Remote Control Code Search .................. 83
Remote control codes for playback
devices ................................................. 83
Remote control ID .................................... 80
Remote control sensor ............................... 4
Remote control signal transmitter ............ 10
REMOTE ID (ADVANCED SETUP) ........... 80
Restore of the default settings ................. 81
Roleplaying Game (Sound program) ....... 37
Router ....................................................... 27

S
SAMPL (Signal information) ..................... 64
Sampling (Signal information) .................. 64
SCENE ...................................................... 35
SCENE (Setup menu, HDMI) .................... 73
SCENE function ........................................ 35
Scene function ......................................... 35
Scene function configuration ................... 35
Sci-Fi (Sound program) ............................ 37
Server ....................................................... 53
SERVER (Input) ........................................ 53
Setup menu .............................................. 66
Setup menu item list ................................. 67
Sharing Setup ........................................... 53
Signal Info (Option menu) ........................ 64
SILENT CINEMA ....................................... 41
Simple play (iPod) .................................... 48
SLEEP key ................................................ 10
Sleep timer ............................................... 10
APPENDIX

➤ Index

En

106

Sound (Setup menu) .................................73
sound field effect ......................................37
Sound mode ..............................................36
Sound program .........................................37
Sound program category ..........................37
SP A indicator ...........................................61
SP B indicator ...........................................61
SP IMP. (ADVANCED SETUP) ..................14
Speaker connection ..................................15
Speaker connection (Bi-amp) ...................16
Speaker connection (Zone B) ...................60
Speaker impedance ..................................12
Speaker impedance setting ......................14
Speaker indicators ......................................8
Speaker placement ...................................12
Spectacle (Sound program) .....................37
Sports (Sound program) ...........................37
Standard (Sound program) .......................37
Standby indicator ........................................7
Standby Sync (Setup menu, HDMI) ..........73
Standby Through (Setup menu, HDMI) ....72
Stereo mini jack .........................................17
Stereo mini-plug cable ..............................17
Stereo pin cable ........................................17
STP network cable ....................................27
STRAIGHT (Sound mode) .........................39
Straight decode ........................................39
Subnet Mask (Setup menu, IP Address) ...77
Subwoofer (Setup menu, Speaker) ...........69
Subwoofer connection ..............................16
Subwoofer Phase
(Setup menu, Speaker) .........................70
Subwoofer Trim (Option menu) .................64
SUR.DEC (Sound mode) ...........................40
SUR.DECODE (Sound mode) ...................40
Surround (Setup menu, Speaker) .............70

Surround Back (Setup menu, Speaker) ... 70
Surround decoder .................................... 40
SW.Trim (Option menu) ............................ 64
System ID (Setup menu, Network) ........... 79

T
Test Tone (Setup menu, Speaker) ........... 71
The Bottom Line (Sound program) ........... 38
The Roxy Theatre (Sound program) ......... 38
Tone Control (Option menu) .................... 63
TONE CONTROL key ............................... 63
TP (Traffic Program) ................................. 45
Traffic information .................................... 45
Traffic Program (Option menu) ................ 45
Treble (Option menu) ............................... 63
TU (ADVANCED SETUP) .......................... 42
Tuning (FM/AM radio) .............................. 42
TV Audio Input (Setup menu, HDMI) ........ 72
TV connection .......................................... 18
TV FORMAT (ADVANCED SETUP) .......... 81
TV operation keys .................................... 10
TV operations (Remote control) ............... 82
TV with HDMI input jacks (Connection) ... 21
TV without HDMI input jacks
(Connection) ........................................ 22

U
UPDATE (ADVANCED SETUP) ................ 81
Update of the unit’s firmware ................... 85
Updating the firmware .............................. 81
USB (Input) ........................................ 47, 50
USB jack .................................................... 7
USB mass storage class .......................... 50
USB storage device ................................. 50

V
V IN (Signal information) .......................... 64
V OUT (Signal information) ....................... 64

VERSION (ADVANCED SETUP) ............... 81
VIDEO AUX jacks ..................................... 26
VIDEO jack ............................................... 17
Video Out (Option menu) ......................... 65
Video pin cable ........................................ 17
Video signal flow ...................................... 96
Video signal type ...................................... 81
Video/audio input jack combination ......... 24
Virtual CINEMA DSP ................................. 39
Virtual Presence Speaker ........................... 6
VOLTAGE SELECTOR .............................. 28
Voltage selector ....................................... 28
Volume (Setup menu, Sound) .................. 75
Volume Interlock (Option menu) .............. 65
Volume Trim (Option menu) ..................... 64
VPS ............................................................. 6
vTuner ID (Network information) .............. 79

W
Warning message (YPAO) ....................... 33
Windows Media Player ............................. 53

Y
Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic
Optimizer .............................................. 30
YPAO ........................................................ 30
YPAO MIC jack ......................................... 30
YPAO microphone .................................... 30

Z
ZB.Trim (Option menu) ............................. 61
ZONE A key .............................................. 61
Zone B ...................................................... 60
ZONE B key .............................................. 61
Zone B operation ...................................... 61
Zone B preparation .................................. 60
Zone B speaker connections ................... 60
Zone B volume adjustment ...................... 61
APPENDIX

➤ Index

En

107

ZoneB (Setup menu) .................................69
ZoneB Trim (Option menu) .......................61

APPENDIX

➤ Index

En

108

© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE161B0/EN

English
Information about software
This product uses the following free software.
For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated below.

■ About ASN.1 object dumping code
ASN.1 object dumping code, copyright Peter Gutmann
, based on ASN.1 dump
program by David Kemp ,
with contributions from various people including
Matthew Hamrick , Bruno Couillard
, Hallvard Furuseth
, Geoff Thorpe
, David Boyce
, John Hughes
, Life is hard, and then
you die , Hans-Olof
Hermansson , Tor
Rustad , Kjetil Barvik
, James Sweeny
, and several other people
whose names I've misplaced.
This code grew slowly over time without much design or
planning, with features being tacked on as required.
It's not representative of my normal coding style.

■ About FLAC codec Library
Copyright ©
2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007,2008,2009
Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:

Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

■ About libexpat
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper
Copyright © 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat
maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

En

1

■ About The Independent JPEG
Group’s JPEG software
The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software
Copyright © 1991-2010, Thomas G. Lane, Guido
Vollbeding.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied, with respect to this software,
its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or fitness for a
particular purpose. This software is provided “AS IS”,
and you, its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality
and accuracy.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this software (or portions thereof) for any
purpose, without fee, subject to these conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this README file must be
included, with this copyright and no-warranty notice
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes
to the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying documentation must state that “this
software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group”.
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only if
the user accepts full responsibility for any
undesirable consequences; the authors accept NO
LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from or
based on the IJG code, not just to the unmodified
library. If you use our work, you ought to acknowledge
us.

Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name in advertising or
publicity relating to this software or products derived
from it. This software may be referred to only as “the
Independent JPEG Group’s software”.
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of commercial products, provided
that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the
product vendor.

■ About JsonCpp
Copyright © 2007-2010 Baptiste Lepilleur
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the
Software without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of
the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

■ About Ogg/Vorbis
Copyright © 2002-2008 Xiph.org Foundation
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
– Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
– Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

En

2

■ About RC4 Algorithm
Copyright Mocana Corp 2003-2005. All Rights
Reserved.
Proprietary and Confidential Material.

■ About zlib Library
Copyright notice:
© 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler
This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or
implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held
liable for any damages arising from the use of this
software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for
any purpose, including commercial applications, and to
alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following
restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote
the original software. If you use this software in a
product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be appreciated but is not
required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as
such, and must not be misrepresented as being the
original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any
source distribution.
Do not disassemble, decompile, or reverse engineer
the software included in Yamaha AV products.

© 2012 Yamaha Corporation YE161A0/SLEN

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 1 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

UAB

1 Preparation
AV Receiver

Accessories
Check that the following accessories are supplied with the product.
Remote control

Easy Setup Guide

Insert the batteries the right way round.

AM antenna

English

To reduce the impact on natural resources, the Owner’s Manual for this product is
supplied on CD-ROM. For more information about this product, refer to the
Owner’s Manual on the supplied CD-ROM.
PDF versions of this guide and “Owner’s Manual” can be downloaded from the
following website.
http://download.yamaha.com/
[For U.S. customers only]
Visit the following website for additional information, FAQ’s, downloads such as
“Owner’s Manual” and product updates.
http://usa.yamaha.com/support/

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

FM antenna

YPAO microphone

*The supplied FM antenna
varies depending on the
region of purchase.

CD-ROM
(Owner’s Manual)

This document explains how to set up a 5.1- or 7.1-channel system (RX-V573
only) and play back surround sound from a BD/DVD on the unit.

Batteries
(AAA, R03, UM-4) (x2)

Safety Brochure

Easy Setup Guide

• The illustrations of the main unit and remote control used in this guide are of the RX-V573 (U.S.A.
model), unless otherwise specified.

Cables required for connections
The following cables (not supplied) are required to build the system described in this
document.
• Speaker cables (depending on the number of speakers)
• HDMI cable (x2)
• Audio pin cable (x1)
• Digital optical cable (x1) (not required if your TV supports ARC [Audio Return Channel])

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 2 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

2 Placing speakers
Set up the speakers in the room using the following diagram as a reference.
For information on other speaker systems, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

5.1-channel system

7.1-channel system
(RX-V573 only)

1

1

9

2

2

3

4

9

3

5

10° to 30°

10° to 30°

6

7

30 cm (1 ft) or more

4

5
10° to 30°

10° to 30°

1 Front speaker (L)
2 Front speaker (R)
3 Center speaker
4 Surround speaker (L)
5 Surround speaker (R)
6 Surround back speaker (L)
7 Surround back speaker (R)
9 Subwoofer

2

En

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 3 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

3 Connecting speakers/subwoofer
• (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Under its default settings, the unit is configured for 8-ohm
speakers. When connecting 6-ohm speakers, set the unit’s
speaker impedance to “6 Ω MIN”. For details, see “Setting the
speaker impedance” in “Owner’s Manual”.

1

Connect the front speakers (1/2)
to the FRONT (//\) terminals.

2

Connect the center speaker (3) to the
CENTER terminal.

The unit (rear)

• (Except for U.S.A. and Canada models)
Use speakers with an impedance of at least 6 Ω.

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS

SPEAKERS

PB

PB
FRONT

• Use a subwoofer equipped with built-in amplifier.

CENTER

SURROUND

FRONT

Y

• Before connecting the speakers, remove the unit’s power cable
from the AC wall outlet and turn off the subwoofer.
• Ensure that the core wires of the speaker cable do not touch
each other or come into contact with the unit’s metal areas. This
may damage the unit or the speakers. If the speaker cables
short circuit, “Check SP Wires” will appear on the front display
when the unit is turned on.

CENTER

SURROUND

Y

OR OUT

OR OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUBWOOFER

■ Connecting speaker cables
Speaker cables have two wires. One is for connecting the
negative (–) terminals of the unit and the speaker, and the
other is for the positive (+) terminals. If the wires are
colored to prevent confusion, connect the black wire to
the negative and the other wire to the positive terminals.
a Remove approximately 10
mm (3/8”) of insulation
from the ends of the
speaker cable and twist
the bare wires of the cable
firmly together.

+ (red)

b

c

FR
ON

1

9

2

1

3

9

2

3

T

d

a
4

– (black)

5

4

5

b Loosen the speaker terminal.
c Insert the bare wires of the cable into the gap on the side
(upper right or bottom left) of the terminal.
d Tighten the terminal.

Using a banana plug
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Australia and General
models only)
a Tighten the speaker
terminal.

Banana plug

a

FR
ON
T

b

b Insert a banana plug into the end of the terminal.
En

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

3

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 4 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

3

Connect the surround speakers (4/
5) to the SURROUND (//\)
terminals.

4

Connect the subwoofer (9) to the
SUBWOOFER jack.

The unit (rear)

Connect the surround back speakers (6/
7) to the SURROUND BACK (//\)
terminals.
The unit (rear)

The unit (rear)
SPEAKERS

SPEAKERS

SPEAKERS

PB

PB

PB
FRONT

For 7.1-channel system (RX-V573 only)

CENTER

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

FRONT

SURROUND

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

Y

Y

Y

OR OUT

OR OUT

OR OUT

SUBWOOFER

SUBWOOFER

SUBWOOFER

Audio pin cable

1

9

4

2

1

3

9

5

4

1

2

9

3

5

En

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

3

4

5
6

4

2

7

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 5 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

4 Connecting external devices

Before connecting the power cable (General model only)
Make sure you set the switch position of
VOLTAGE SELECTOR according to your local voltage.
Voltages are AC 110-120/220-240 V, 50/60 Hz.

TV

Audio out
(optical)

HDMI in

HDMI out

HDMI

HDMI

BD/DVD player
OPTICAL

HDMI

O

HDMI OUT
jack

a

b Connect a TV to the unit with the other HDMI cable.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)

VOLTAGE
SELECTOR

c Connect a TV to the unit with a digital optical cable.
This connection is required to play back TV audio
on the unit. This connection is not required if your
TV supports ARC (Audio Return Channel).

HDMI 1 jack
HDMI

HDMI

HDMI OUT

(BD/DVD)

Connect external devices to the unit.
a Connect a BD/DVD player to the unit with an HDMI
cable.
If the BD/DVD player is currently connected to the
TV directly with an HDMI cable, disconnect the
cable from the TV and connect it to this unit.

HDMI

b

c

1

110V120V

HDMI 1

220V240V

d Connect the power cable to an AC wall outlet.

ARC

d
HDMI OUT

HDMI 2

HDMI 1

HDMI 3

HDMI 4

NETWORK

(BD/DVD)

ANTENNA
AM

COMPONENT
VIDEO

FM

PR

PR

PB

PB

SPEAKERS
FRONT

O

AV 4 (OPTICAL) jack

CENTER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK/BI AMP
/ZONE B
SINGLE

Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO

VIDEO

OPTICAL
(TV)
AV 4

OPTICAL

COAXIAL

COAXIAL

OPTICAL

AV 1

AV 2

AV 3

AV 4

• For information on how to connect radio antennas or other
external devices, see “PREPARATIONS” in “Owner’s Manual”.

To an AC wall
outlet

ARC

2

Turn on the unit, the TV and the BD/DVD
player.

3

Use the TV remote control to change the
TV input to video from the unit.

Y
MONITOR OUT

( TV )

AV 5

AV 6

AV
OUT

SUBWOOFER
AUDIO

The unit (rear)

The connections are complete. Proceed to the next
page to optimize the speaker settings.
YPAO MIC

Turn on the unit

DIRECT

INFO

MEMORY

PRESET

FM

AM

TUNING

VOLUME
SCENE

BD
DVD

PHONES

INPUT

TONE CONTROL

TV

NET

PROGRAM

RADIO

STRAIGHT

SILENT CINEMA

VIDEO AUX

AUDIO

VIDEO

USB

• By connecting a TV to the unit with an HDMI cable, you can
configure the unit’s settings with the menu displayed on the TV. In
addition, you can select the on-screen menu language from English
(default), French, German, Spanish, Russian and Chinese. For
details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”. In this guide, illustrations of
English menu screens are used as examples.

iPod/iPhone/iPad
5V 2.1A

The unit (front)

En

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

5

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 6 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

5 Optimizing the speaker settings automatically (YPAO)

1

The Yamaha Parametric room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) function detects speaker connections, measures the
distances from them to your listening position(s), and then automatically optimizes the speaker settings, such as
volume balance and acoustic parameters, to suit your room.

Connect the YPAO microphone to the
YPAO MIC jack on the front panel.
The following screen appears.

Auto Setup

• During the measuring process, test tones are output at high volume. Ensure that
the test tones do not frighten small children. Also, refrain from using this function at
night when it may be a nuisance to others.

Exit

HDMI

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

A

• During the measuring process, keep the room as quiet as possible.
• Do not connect headphones.

5

6

AUDIO

V-AUX

USB

NET

• Move to the corner of the room or leave the room.

TUNER

B
ZONE

FM

VOL.

INFO

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

The unit (front)

TUNING

ENHANCER

SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

R
SR

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

DISPLAY

POP-UP
MENU

MUTE

MODE

YPAO microphone
Listening position

• To cancel the operation, disconnect the YPAO microphone, or
use the cursor keys to select “Exit” and press ENTER, before
starting the measurement.

SETUP

OPTION

SETUP

TOP
MENU

MAX

SW
C

DIRECT

SLEEP

CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT

MIN

L
SL

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

Turn on the subwoofer and set
the volume to half. If the
crossover frequency is
adjustable, set it to maximum.

MAX

[SETUP]:Start

AM
PRESET

MIN

Power Amp Assign
Basic

AV

• Do not stand between the speakers and the YPAO microphone during the
measurement process (about 3 minutes).

VOLUME

Press SETUP key
to Start

SOURCE RECEIVER

• During the measuring process, you cannot adjust the volume.

Preparing for YPAO

Start

CODE SET

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

0

10

Cursor keys
ENTER

2

To start the measurement, press SETUP.
The measurement will start in 10 seconds.
The following screen appears on the TV when
the measurement finishes.
Auto Setup
Start

ENT

Exit

TV

Result
3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

INPUT
TV VOL

Measurement
Finished

3.0 / 10.5 m

TV CH

MUTE

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

Ear height

Place the YPAO microphone at your
listening position (same height as your
ears). We recommend the use of a
tripod as a microphone stand. You can
use the tripod screws to fix the
microphone in place.

6

En

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

VOL.

Finished

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 7 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

If “W-1:Out of Phase” appears
• If any error message (such as E-1) or warning message (such
as W-2) appears, see “Error messages” or “Warning
messages” in “Owner’s Manual”.
• If the warning message “W-1:Out of Phase” appears, see “If
“W-1:Out of Phase” appears”.

3

Use the cursor keys (e/r) to select
“SAVE” (Save) and press ENTER.

Follow the procedure below to check the speaker
connections.
Depending on the type of speakers or room
environment, this message may appear even if the
speakers are connected correctly.

Auto Setup
Start

Auto Setup

Measurement
Finished

Start
Exit

SAVE

Measurement
Finished
Result

Exit

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

Result

3.0 / 10.5 m

3 / 2 / 0.1 ch

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

3.0 / 10.5 m

Warning
message

W-1:Out of Phase

-3.0 / +10.0 dB

a Check for the blinking of the front display’s indicator to
identify the problem speaker.
VOL.

>SaveCancel

4

L
SL

SW
C

Problem speaker (blinks)
R
SR

Disconnect the YPAO microphone from the
unit.

This completes optimization of the speaker settings.
• The YPAO microphone is sensitive to heat, so should not be
placed anywhere where it could be exposed to direct sunlight or
high temperatures (such as on top of AV equipment).

VOL.

W-1:PHASE

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

b Check the cable connections (+/-) of the problem
speaker.

If the speaker is connected correctly:
You can save the current settings.
Proceed to step 3.
If the speaker is connected incorrectly:
Turn off the unit, reconnect the speaker cable, and then
try YPAO measurement again.

En

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

7

RX-V473_573_esg_U.fm Page 8 Monday, January 23, 2012 2:40 PM

6 Playing back a BD/DVD
Now let’s play back a BD/DVD.
We recommend playing back multichannel audio
(5.1-channel or more) to feel surround sound produced
by the unit.

Many more features!
1

Press HDMI 1 to select “HDMI 1” as the
input source.
VOL.

HDMI1

CODE SET

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

SOURCE RECEIVER

HDMI

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

AUDIO

A

V-AUX

USB

NET

HDMI 1

AV

1

2
3

Press STRAIGHT repeatedly to select
“STRAIGHT”.
VOL.

STRAIGHT

AM

MEMORY

MOVIE

MUSIC

PRESET

L
SL

SW
C

R
SR

TUNING

SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT

STRAIGHT
ENHANCER

• When “STRAIGHT” (straight decode) is enabled, each
speaker produces each channel audio signal directly (without
sound field processing).

DIRECT

SLEEP
SCENE
BD
DVD

TV

NET

RADIO

• (RX-V573 only)
If you play back 5.1-channel audio on the 7.1-channel system,
no sounds will be heard from the surround back speakers.

OPTION

SETUP

VOLUME

ENTER
RETURN

POP-UP
MENU

VOLUME

4

DISPLAY

TOP
MENU

Press VOLUME to adjust the volume.

MUTE

VOL.

MODE

Volume -30.0dB
1

2

3

5

6

7

9

0

10

R
SR

This completes the basic setup procedure.

ENT

If surround sound is not working

TV
INPUT
TV VOL

L
SL

SW
C

4

8

Connecting other playback
devices
Connect audio devices (such as CD player),
game consoles, camcorders, and many others.

Selecting the sound mode

B
ZONE

FM

Please refer to “Owner’s Manual” on the supplied
CD-ROM to help you get the most out of the unit.

Start playback on the BD/DVD player.

TUNER

INFO

The unit has various other functions.

TV CH

MUTE

Sound is only being output from the front speakers
during multichannel audio playback
Check the digital audio output setting on the BD/DVD
player.
It may be set to 2-channel output (such as PCM).

Select the desired sound program (CINEMA
DSP) or surround decoder suitable for movies,
music, games, sports programs, and other uses.

Playing back from iPod
By using a USB cable supplied with iPod, you
can enjoy iPod music on the unit.

■ Listening to FM/AM radio
■ Playing back music stored on
a USB storage device
■ Playing back the network
contents
■ Selecting the input source and
favorite settings at once
For more information, see “What you can do
with the unit”.

No sound is coming from a specific speaker
See “Troubleshooting” in “Owner’s Manual”.
© 2012 Yamaha Corporation

Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI

Printed in Malaysia ZA52610

List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de commande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Elenco dei codici di telecomando
Lista de códigos de mando a distancia
TV
A.R. Systems
Acme
Acura
ADC
Admiral

0320
0342
0323, 0343
0337
0054, 0178, 0336, 0337,
0339, 0346, 0347
Advent
0158
Adventura
0057
Adyson
0277, 0282, 0342
Agashi
0277, 0282
Agazi
0337
Aiko
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343
Aim
0320
Aiwa
0078, 0379
Akai
0050, 0055, 0109, 0159,
0181, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0340, 0343, 0349,
0350
Akiba
0320, 0340
Akura
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340
Alaron
0277
Alba
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0351, 0372, 0382
Albatron
0140
Alcyon
0171
Alleron
0059
Allorgan
0282
Allstar
0320, 0350
America Action 0179
AMOi
0276
Amplivision
0161, 0282, 0321, 0342
Amstrad
0320, 0323, 0337, 0340,
0343
Amtron
0058

Anam
Anam National
Anglo
Anitech

0179, 0343
0052, 0058
0323, 0343
0171, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0343
Ansonic
0161, 0168, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0343
AOC
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053
Apex
0039, 0111, 0217
Arcam
0277, 0282
Arcam Delta
0342
Aristona
0320, 0349, 0350
Arthur Martin 0321
ASA
0339, 0347
Asberg
0171, 0320, 0350
Astra
0343
Asuka
0277, 0282, 0337, 0340,
0342
Atlantic
0277, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Atori
0323, 0343
Auchan
0321
Audiosonic
0161, 0282, 0320, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
AudioTon
0161, 0282, 0342
Audiovox
0058, 0179, 0194
Ausind
0171
Autovox
0171, 0282, 0337, 0339,
0342
Aventura
0051
Awa
0277, 0282
Axion
0156
Baird
0282
Bang & Olufsen 0180, 0339
Basic Line
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Bastide
0282, 0342
Baur
0320, 0349

Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
Liste over fjernbetjeningskoder
Liste over fjernkontrollkoder

Bazin
Beko
Belcor
Bell & Howell
Benq
Beon
Best
Bestar
Binatone
Blue Sky
Blue Star
Boots
BPL
Bradford
Brandt
Brillian
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Britannia
Brockwood
Broksonic
Bruns
BTC
Bush

byd:sign
Candle
Capsonic
Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio

0282
0161, 0269, 0294, 0302,
0311, 0320, 0328, 0351
0008
0019, 0054
0097, 0242, 0361
0320, 0349, 0350
0161
0161, 0320, 0350
0282, 0342
0320, 0340
0348
0282, 0342
0320, 0348
0058, 0179
0322, 0345
0182
0320
0320, 0339, 0349, 0350
0277, 0282, 0342
0008
0109, 0179
0339
0340
0269, 0282, 0283, 0304,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0332,
0340, 0343, 0344, 0346,
0348, 0349, 0350, 0372,
0382, 0463, 0470, 0472
0093
0008, 0026, 0050, 0057
0337
0320
0050
0344
0010
0320, 0323, 0343
0367

Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Centurion
Century
CGE
Changhong
Chimei
Cimline
Citizen

0320, 0349, 0350
0183, 0282
0055, 0107
0039
0320, 0349, 0350
0339
0161, 0171
0039
0273
0323, 0343
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0058
City
0323, 0343
Clarion
0179
Clarivox
0349
Clatronic
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0351
CMS
0277
CMS Hightec 0282
Coby
0197
Colortyme
0008, 0026
Commercial Solutions
0021
Concerto
0008, 0026
Concorde
0323, 0343
Condor
0161, 0277, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0350, 0351
Contec
0179, 0277, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344
Contec/Cony
0012, 0058
Continental Edison
0345
Cosmel
0323, 0343
Craig
0058, 0179
Crosley
0010, 0037, 0171, 0339

1

Crown

0058, 0161, 0171, 0179,
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351
CS Electronics 0277, 0340, 0342
CTC Clatronic 0341
CTX
0205
Curtis Mathes 0007, 0008, 0010, 0019,
0021, 0026, 0049, 0050,
0178
CXC
0058, 0179
Cybertron
0340
Cytron
0152
Daewoo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0037,
0053, 0167, 0266, 0275,
0277, 0282, 0315, 0320,
0323, 0331, 0335, 0342,
0343, 0350, 0381, 0465
Dainichi
0277, 0340
Dansai
0277, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0349, 0350
Dantax
0161, 0349
Dawa
0320
Daytron
0007, 0008, 0026, 0323,
0343
De Graaf
0346
Decca
0282, 0320, 0342, 0349,
0350
Dell
0145, 0245
Denver
0358, 0362
Desmet
0320, 0349, 0350
Diamant
0320
Diamond
0277
DiamondVision 0135, 0143
Dimensia
0049
Disney
0219
Dixi
0282, 0320, 0323, 0343,
0349, 0350
Dream Vision 0461, 0498
DTS
0323, 0343
Dual
0282, 0320, 0342
Dual-Tec
0342, 0343
Dumont
0008, 0030, 0062, 0282,
0339, 0341, 0342
Durabrand
0031, 0051, 0179, 0215
Dux
0349
Dwin
0178
Dynatron
0320, 0349, 0350
Dynex
0228, 0231
EIZO
0509
Elbe
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320

Elcit
Electa
ELECTRO TECH
Electroband
Electrograph
Electrohome
Element
Elin

0339
0348
0343
0055, 0107
0176
0008, 0026, 0052, 0055
0230
0277, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0349, 0350
Elite
0320, 0340, 0350
Elman
0341
Elta
0277, 0323, 0343
Emerson
0000, 0007, 0008, 0012,
0013, 0019, 0026, 0031,
0037, 0051, 0058, 0059,
0161, 0179, 0320, 0339
Emprex
0154
Envision
0008, 0026, 0050
Epson
0155, 0206, 0359
Erres
0320, 0349, 0350
ESA
0051
ESC
0282
Etron
0343
Eurofeel
0282
Euro-Feel
0337
Euroline
0349
Euroman
0161, 0277, 0282
Euromann
0320, 0337, 0342, 0350
Europhon
0277, 0282, 0320, 0341,
0342, 0350
Expert
0321
Exquisit
0320
Fenner
0323, 0343
Ferguson
0322, 0345, 0349
Fidelity
0277, 0320, 0342, 0346
Filsai
0282
Finlandia
0346
Finlux
0171, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0341, 0342, 0349, 0350
FIRST LINE
0342, 0343, 0350
Firstline
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Fisher
0019, 0161, 0282, 0339,
0342, 0344, 0351
Flint
0320, 0350
Formenti
0171, 0277, 0336, 0339,
0342, 0349
Formenti/Phoenix 0277
Fortress
0336, 0339
Fraba
0161, 0320
Friac
0161

Frontech

0282, 0323, 0337, 0343,
0346, 0347
Fujitsu
0059, 0069, 0074, 0075,
0282
Fujitsu General 0282
Fujitsu Siemens 0504, 0505, 0507, 0510,
0511
Funai
0051, 0058, 0059, 0112,
0113, 0115, 0118, 0119,
0179, 0337, 0488, 0489
Futuretech
0058, 0179
Galaxi
0320, 0351
Galaxis
0161, 0320
Gateway
0176, 0177, 0241
GBC
0323, 0343, 0344
GE
0008, 0021, 0023, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0034, 0049,
0052, 0056, 0209
Geant Casino
0321
GEC
0282, 0320, 0342, 0347,
0349, 0350
Geloso
0323, 0343, 0346
General Technic 0323, 0343
Genexxa
0320, 0340, 0347, 0350
GFM
0128, 0227
Giant
0282
Gibralter
0008, 0030, 0050, 0062
GoldHand
0277
Goldline
0320
GoldStar
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0031, 0050, 0053, 0161,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0342, 0343, 0346, 0349,
0350
Goodmans
0246, 0272, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350, 0462, 0473,
0477
Gorenje
0161, 0351
GPM
0340
GPX
0129
Gradiente
0240
Graetz
0347
Granada
0171, 0282, 0320, 0321,
0342, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350
Grandin
0340, 0343, 0348, 0349
Gronic
0282
Grundig
0160, 0161, 0171, 0310,
0320

Grunpy
Haier
Halifax
Hallmark
Hampton
Hanseatic

0058, 0059, 0179
0157, 0233
0277, 0282, 0337, 0342
0008, 0026, 0031
0277, 0282, 0342
0161, 0168, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0349, 0350
Hantarex
0320, 0323, 0343
Hantor
0320
Harman/Kardon 0010
Harvard
0058, 0179
Harwood
0320, 0323
Havermy
0178
HCM
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0348
Hema
0282, 0323
Hewlett Packard 0192
Higashi
0277
HiLine
0320
Hinari
0320, 0323, 0340, 0343,
0344, 0349, 0350
Hisawa
0321, 0340, 0348
Hisense
0247
Hitachi
0008, 0012, 0026, 0066,
0084, 0092, 0093, 0120,
0172, 0173, 0255, 0270,
0271, 0282, 0320, 0335,
0338, 0342, 0344, 0346,
0347, 0365, 0382, 0448,
0456, 0467, 0482, 0484,
0487
Hornyphon
0320, 0350
Hoshai
0340
Huanyu
0277, 0342
Hygashi
0277, 0282, 0342
Hyper
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342,
0343
Hypson
0282, 0320, 0321, 0337,
0342, 0348, 0349, 0350
Hyundai
0141
Iberia
0320
ICE
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0343,
0350
ICeS
0277
Ilo
0148, 0153
IMA
0058
Imperial
0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350, 0351

2

Indiana
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Initial
Inno Hit
Innovation
Insignia
Inteq
Interactive
Interbuy
Interfunk
International
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITV
Janeil
JBL
JC Penney
JCB
Jensen
JVC

Kaisui
Kamosonic
Kamp
Kapsch
Karcher
Kawasho
KEC
Kendo
Kenwood
KIC

0320, 0349, 0350
0010
0250, 0327, 0363, 0479,
0508
0347
0323, 0343
0153
0171, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350
0337, 0343
0131, 0228, 0236, 0238
0030
0161
0323, 0343
0161, 0320, 0339, 0347,
0349, 0350
0277
0161, 0282, 0320, 0337,
0341, 0342
0171, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0349, 0350
0320, 0340
0282, 0342
0277, 0320, 0340, 0348,
0350
0343, 0347
0320, 0343, 0349
0057
0010
0007, 0008, 0026, 0027,
0049, 0053, 0056
0055, 0107
0008, 0026
0012, 0014, 0015, 0056,
0064, 0065, 0067, 0169,
0174, 0297, 0314, 0344,
0350, 0375
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0340, 0342, 0343, 0348
0342
0277, 0342
0347
0161, 0320, 0342, 0343,
0349
0008, 0026, 0055, 0277
0179
0161, 0320, 0341, 0346
0008, 0026, 0050
0282

Kingsley
KLH
Kloss Novabeam
Kneissel
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
KTV
Kyoto
Lasat
Lenco
Lenoir
Leyco
LG

LG/GoldStar
Liesenk
Liesenkotter
Life
Lifetec
Lloyds
Loewe
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxman
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon

0277, 0342
0039
0057, 0058
0161, 0168, 0320
0320, 0350
0340
0320, 0349, 0350
0161, 0339
0320
0343
0007, 0050, 0058, 0179,
0183, 0282, 0342
0277, 0282
0161
0323, 0343
0323, 0342, 0343
0320, 0337, 0349, 0350
0031, 0053, 0066, 0116,
0117, 0140, 0161, 0164,
0175, 0195, 0269, 0277,
0282, 0300, 0309, 0317,
0320, 0323, 0328, 0342,
0343, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0366, 0368, 0377, 0466,
0471, 0478
0164
0349
0320
0337, 0343
0320, 0323, 0337, 0343
0323
0161, 0168, 0265, 0320,
0330, 0352
0339, 0349, 0350
0054
0320, 0323, 0346, 0349
0282, 0320, 0346, 0349,
0350
0350
0008, 0026
0282, 0342, 0346
0010, 0019, 0021, 0026,
0027, 0031, 0049, 0111
0342, 0343, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350
0096
0339, 0341, 0349
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342

Magnavox

0008, 0009, 0010, 0013,
0026, 0032, 0033, 0048,
0050, 0128, 0211, 0212,
0224, 0226, 0239
Magnum
0337, 0343
Majestic
0054
Mandor
0337
Manesth
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Marantz
0008, 0010, 0026, 0050,
0204, 0320, 0349, 0350
Marelli
0339
Mark
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0349, 0350
Masuda
0282
Matsui
0282, 0320, 0323, 0342,
0343, 0344, 0346, 0349,
0350, 0455
Matsushita
0017
Maxent
0147, 0176
Mediator
0320, 0349, 0350
Medion
0320, 0337, 0343
Megapower
0140
Megatron
0026, 0031
MElectronic
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323
Melvox
0321
Memorex
0019, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0054, 0137, 0215, 0323,
0343
Memphis
0323, 0343
Mercury
0320, 0323
Metz
0339
MGA
0008, 0026, 0031, 0050,
0053
Micromaxx
0337, 0343
Microstar
0337, 0343
Midland
0007, 0021, 0023, 0027,
0030, 0056, 0062
Minerva
0171
Minoka
0320, 0350
Mintek
0153
Mitsubishi
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053,
0066, 0084, 0093, 0098,
0150, 0178, 0289, 0320,
0339, 0344, 0350, 0376
Mivar
0161, 0168, 0171, 0277,
0282, 0342
Monivision
0140
Montgomery Ward
0054

Motion
Motorola
MTC
Multi System
Multitech

Murphy
NAD
Naonis
NEC
Neckermann
NEI
Net-TV
Neufunk
New Tech
New World
NewTech
Nicamagic
Nikkai
Nikko
Nobliko
Nokia
Norcent
Nordic
Nordmende
Nordvision
Novatronic
Oceanic
Okano
Olevia
ONCEAS
Onwa
Opera
Oppo
Optimus
Optoma
Optonica
Orbit

0171
0052, 0178
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0161, 0277
0349
0058, 0161, 0179, 0183,
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0341, 0342, 0343, 0344,
0346, 0349
0277, 0342
0026, 0031, 0111
0346
0008, 0026, 0050, 0052,
0053, 0072, 0103, 0282,
0344
0161, 0282, 0320, 0339,
0342, 0346, 0349, 0350,
0351
0320, 0349, 0350
0176
0320, 0323
0343, 0350
0340
0282, 0320, 0323
0277, 0342
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350
0026, 0031, 0050
0171, 0277, 0341, 0342
0347
0201
0282
0339, 0345, 0347, 0350
0349
0320
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0351
0102, 0199, 0200, 0207,
0222
0342
0058, 0179
0320
0130
0017, 0019
0144
0178
0320, 0350

3

Orion

0043, 0146, 0283, 0320,
0323, 0328, 0343, 0349,
0350
Orline
0320
Osaki
0282, 0320, 0337, 0340,
0342
Oso
0340
Otto Versand
0282, 0320, 0336, 0342,
0344, 0348, 0349, 0350
Pael
0277, 0342
Palladium
0161, 0282, 0320, 0342,
0351
Palsonic
0282
Panama
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0342, 0343
Panasonic
0016, 0017, 0020, 0022,
0023, 0035, 0052, 0056,
0084, 0085, 0133, 0163,
0193, 0284, 0286, 0290,
0292, 0320, 0325, 0347,
0356, 0483, 0485, 0490
Panavision
0320
Pathe Cinema 0161, 0168, 0277, 0321,
0342
Pausa
0323, 0343
Penney
0021, 0023, 0031, 0050,
0111
Perdio
0277, 0320
Perfekt
0320
Philco
0008, 0009, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0050, 0052, 0053,
0161, 0171, 0320, 0339
Philharmonic
0282, 0342
Philips
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0012, 0032, 0048, 0049,
0052, 0122, 0128, 0134,
0186, 0187, 0213, 0221,
0224, 0226, 0239, 0256,
0257, 0259, 0261, 0263,
0267, 0280, 0281, 0287,
0296, 0299, 0301, 0303,
0305, 0313, 0319, 0320,
0324, 0333, 0339, 0342,
0349, 0350, 0353, 0357,
0360, 0380, 0383, 0452,
0459, 0460
Philips Magnavox 0011, 0032, 0033
Phoenix
0161, 0277, 0320, 0339,
0349, 0350

Phonola

0277, 0320, 0339, 0349,
0350
Pilot
0007, 0008, 0050
Pioneer
0008, 0026, 0094, 0095,
0161, 0320, 0345, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0458, 0480
Plantron
0320, 0323, 0337, 0350
Playsonic
0282
Polaroid
0039, 0142, 0202, 0234
Poppy
0323, 0343
Portland
0007, 0008, 0026, 0053
Prandoni-Prince 0171, 0346
Precision
0282, 0342
Prima
0157, 0243, 0323, 0343,
0347
Princeton
0140
Prism
0023, 0056
Profex
0323, 0343
Profi-Tronic
0320, 0350
Proline
0320, 0350
Proscan
0021, 0027, 0049
Prosonic
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349
Protech
0282, 0337, 0341, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
Proton
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031
Protron
0196
PROVIEW
0096, 0246
Provision
0320, 0349
Pulsar
0008, 0030, 0062
Pye
0256, 0320, 0349, 0350,
0378
Pymi
0323, 0343
Quandra Vision 0321
Quasar
0017, 0023, 0052, 0056
Quelle
0282, 0320, 0337, 0342,
0349, 0350
Questa
0344
Radialva
0320
RadioShack
0019, 0021, 0031, 0050,
0179, 0320
RadioShack/Realistic
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0049, 0058
Radiola
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Radiomarelli
0320, 0339
Radiotone
0161, 0320, 0323, 0350
Rank
0344

RCA

0008, 0021, 0024, 0025,
0026, 0027, 0042, 0049,
0052, 0053, 0063, 0136,
0225
Realistic
0019, 0031, 0050, 0179
Recor
0320
Redstar
0320
Reflex
0320
Revox
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350
Rex
0337, 0346, 0347
RFT
0161, 0168, 0339
Rhapsody
0277
R-Line
0320, 0349, 0350
Roadstar
0323, 0337, 0340, 0343
Robotron
0339
Rowa
0277, 0282
Royal Lux
0161
RTF
0339
Runco
0030, 0050, 0062
Saba
0298, 0322, 0339, 0345,
0347
Saisho
0282, 0323, 0337, 0342,
0343
Salora
0346, 0347
Sambers
0171, 0341
Sampo
0007, 0008, 0026, 0050,
0176
Samsung
0004, 0005, 0006, 0007,
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0036, 0050, 0053, 0076,
0077, 0079, 0114, 0124,
0125, 0126, 0127, 0139,
0161, 0183, 0185, 0190,
0191, 0258, 0264, 0277,
0282, 0320, 0323, 0334,
0337, 0342, 0343, 0349,
0350, 0351, 0373, 0453,
0468
Sandra
0277, 0282, 0342
Sansui
0043, 0109, 0320, 0350
Sanyo
0008, 0019, 0068, 0070,
0071, 0099, 0161, 0168,
0223, 0237, 0277, 0282,
0288, 0295, 0323, 0342,
0344, 0369, 0469
SBR
0320, 0349
Sceptre
0235, 0244
Schaub Lorenz 0347

Schneider
Scotch
Scott
Sears
SEG
SEI
SEI-Sinudyne
Seleco
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Sharp

Sheng Chia
Shogun
Siarem
Sierra
Siesta
Signature
Silva
Silver
Singer
Sinudyne
Skantic
Solavox
Sonitron
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec

0282, 0316, 0318, 0320,
0333, 0340, 0342, 0349,
0350, 0382
0026, 0031
0008, 0012, 0026, 0031,
0058, 0059, 0149, 0179
0008, 0010, 0019, 0021,
0026, 0027, 0031, 0049,
0051, 0059, 0111
0277, 0282, 0320, 0323,
0337, 0341, 0342, 0344,
0349, 0382
0320
0339, 0341, 0347
0344, 0346, 0347
0323, 0343
0323
0277
0000, 0001, 0002, 0003,
0007, 0008, 0012, 0026,
0060, 0088, 0089, 0091,
0138, 0165, 0170, 0178,
0198, 0229, 0262, 0278,
0279, 0291, 0308, 0312,
0336, 0344, 0354, 0370,
0449, 0450, 0451, 0464,
0474, 0476, 0481
0178
0008
0320, 0339, 0341
0320, 0350
0161
0054
0277
0344
0321, 0339, 0341
0320, 0339, 0341, 0349
0347
0347
0161, 0282
0282, 0320, 0323, 0337,
0342, 0343, 0349, 0350
0321, 0347
0161, 0320, 0349, 0350

4

Sony

0038, 0044, 0045, 0047,
0055, 0090, 0104, 0105,
0107, 0110, 0123, 0184,
0220, 0248, 0249, 0251,
0252, 0254, 0326, 0343,
0344, 0371, 0374, 0457,
0475, 0486
Sound & Vision 0340, 0341
Soundesign
0008, 0026, 0031, 0058,
0059, 0179
Soundwave
0320, 0349, 0350
Squareview
0051
SSS
0008, 0058, 0179
Standard
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0342, 0343, 0350
Starlite
0058, 0179, 0320, 0323,
0349
Stenway
0348
Stern
0346, 0347
Strato
0320, 0323
Stylandia
0282
Sunkai
0343
Sunstar
0320, 0323
Sunwood
0320, 0323, 0343, 0350
Superla
0277, 0282, 0342
Superscan
0013, 0178
SuperTech
0277, 0320, 0323
Supra
0323, 0343
Supre-Macy
0057
Supreme
0055, 0107
Susumu
0340
Sutron
0323, 0343
SVA
0151
Sydney
0277, 0282, 0342
Sylvania
0008, 0009, 0010, 0011,
0013, 0026, 0048, 0050,
0051, 0128, 0227, 0253
Symphonic
0051, 0058, 0062, 0128,
0179, 0215
Syntax
0199
Syntax-Brillian 0199
Sysline
0349
Sytong
0277
Tandy
0178, 0282, 0336, 0340,
0342, 0347
Tashiko
0277, 0282, 0342, 0344,
0346
Tatung
0052, 0177, 0282, 0320,
0342, 0349, 0350
TCM
0337, 0343

Teac
Tec
Technics
TechniSat
Techwood
TEDELEX
Teknika

0282, 0320
0282, 0323, 0342, 0343
0017, 0023, 0056
0274, 0496, 0497, 0499
0008, 0023, 0026, 0056
0282
0007, 0008, 0010, 0012,
0026, 0053, 0054, 0058,
0059, 0179
Teleavia
0345
Telecor
0282, 0320
Telefunken
0320, 0322, 0345, 0350
Telegazi
0320
Telemeister
0320
Telesonic
0320
Telestar
0320
Teletech
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Teleton
0282, 0342
Televideon
0277
Televiso
0321
Tensai
0282, 0320, 0323, 0340,
0343, 0350
Tesmet
0350
Tevion
0337, 0343
Texet
0277, 0282, 0323, 0342
Thomson
0162, 0188, 0189, 0285,
0320, 0322, 0342, 0345,
0350
Thorn
0320, 0349
TMK
0008, 0026, 0031
TNCi
0030
Tokai
0282, 0320, 0350
Tokyo
0277, 0342
Tomashi
0348
Toshiba
0018, 0019, 0040, 0041,
0046, 0073, 0100, 0103,
0108, 0109, 0111, 0121,
0132, 0166, 0208, 0210,
0214, 0217, 0260, 0268,
0282, 0283, 0293, 0304,
0306, 0307, 0329, 0344,
0355, 0454, 0491
Totevision
0007
Towada
0282, 0347
Trakton
0282
Trans Continens 0282, 0320
Transtec
0277
Trident
0282
Triumph
0320

Uher

0161, 0171, 0320, 0347,
0350
Ultravox
0277, 0320, 0339, 0341,
0342
Unic Line
0320
United
0349
Universum
0161, 0171, 0282, 0320,
0337, 0349, 0350, 0351
Univox
0320
Vector Research 0050
Vestel
0282, 0320, 0346, 0347,
0349, 0350, 0351
Vexa
0320, 0323, 0343, 0349
Victor
0015, 0344, 0350
VIDEOLOGIC 0277
Videologique
0277, 0282, 0340, 0342
VideoSystem
0320, 0350
Videotechnic
0277, 0282
Vidikron
0010
Vidtech
0008, 0026, 0031, 0053
Viewsonic
0176, 0203, 0232, 0364
Viking
0057
Viore
0148
Visiola
0277, 0342
Vision
0282, 0320, 0350
Vizio
0008, 0177, 0218, 0242,
0500, 0501, 0502, 0503,
0506
Vortec
0320, 0349, 0350
Voxson
0171, 0320, 0339, 0346,
0347, 0350
Waltham
0282, 0320, 0342
Wards
0008, 0009, 0010, 0026,
0031, 0048, 0049, 0050,
0053, 0054, 0059
Watson
0320, 0349, 0350
Watt Radio
0277, 0341, 0342
Waycon
0111
Wega
0320, 0339, 0344
Wegavox
0323
Weltblick
0282, 0320, 0349, 0350
Westinghouse 0107, 0216, 0220
White Westinghouse
0037, 0090, 0277, 0320,
0341, 0342, 0349
Wincom
0101, 0106
Xrypton
0320
Yamaha
0008, 0026, 0050, 0053,
0080, 0081, 0082, 0083,
0086, 0087

Yamishi
Yokan
Yoko
Yorx
Zanussi
Zenith

0282, 0320
0320
0161, 0277, 0282, 0320,
0323, 0337, 0340, 0342,
0343, 0349, 0350
0340
0282, 0346
0008, 0028, 0029, 0030,
0031, 0054, 0061, 0062

VCR
ABS
Adventura
Adyson
Aiwa
Akai
Akiba
Akura
Alba

1016
1069
1008
1024, 1026, 1027, 1069
1021, 1027
1008, 1029
1008, 1027, 1029
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Alienware
1016
Ambassador
1030
American High 1068
Amstrad
1008, 1009, 1026
Anitech
1008, 1029
Apex
1088
ASA
1028, 1031
Asha
1070
Asuka
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1031
Audio Dynamics 1064
Audiosonic
1009
Audiovox
1071
Baird
1009, 1025, 1026, 1027
Bang & Olufsen 1017
Basic Line
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1030
Baur
1028
Beaumark
1070
Bell & Howell 1065
Bestar
1009, 1025, 1030
Black Panther Line
1009, 1025
Blaupunkt
1028
Bondstec
1008, 1030
Broksonic
1100

5

Bush

1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1029, 1049, 1051, 1063,
1217
Calix
1071
Candle
1070, 1071
Canon
1068
Cathay
1009
Catron
1030
CGE
1026, 1027
Cimline
1008, 1024, 1029
CineVision
1104
Citizen
1070, 1071
Clatronic
1008, 1030
Colortyme
1064
Condor
1009, 1025, 1030
Craig
1070, 1071
Crown
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1030
Curtis Mathes 1064, 1068, 1070
Cybernex
1070
CyberPower
1016
Daewoo
1009, 1025, 1030, 1038,
1069, 1223
Dansai
1008, 1009, 1029
Dantax
1024
Daytron
1009, 1025
DBX
1064
De Graaf
1028
Decca
1026, 1027, 1028
Dell
1016
Denko
1008
DiamondVision 1096
DigiFusion
1014
DIRECTV
1019, 1105, 1110, 1111,
1113, 1116, 1122
Dish Network 1018
Dishpro
1018
Dual
1009, 1027, 1028
Dumont
1026, 1028
Durabrand
1114
Dynatech
1069
Echostar
1018
Elbe
1009
Elcatech
1008
Electrohome
1071
Electrophonic 1071
Elsay
1008
Elta
1008, 1009, 1029
Emerson
1008, 1020, 1068, 1069,
1071

ESC
Etzuko
Expressvu
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
Firstline
Fisher
Flint
Formenti/Phoenix
Frontech
Fuji
Fujitsu
Funai
Galaxy
Garrard
Gateway
GBC
GE
GEC
Geloso
General
General Technic
GOI
GoldHand
Goldstar
Goodmans

1009, 1025
1008, 1029
1018
1027
1008, 1026
1028
1026, 1027, 1028
1008, 1024, 1029, 1031
1065
1024
1028
1030
1068
1026
1026, 1069
1026
1069
1016
1029, 1030
1068, 1070
1028
1029
1030
1024
1018
1008, 1029
1026, 1031, 1064, 1071
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Gradiente
1069
Graetz
1027
Granada
1028
Grandin
1008, 1009, 1025, 1026,
1029, 1030, 1031
Grundig
1028, 1029
Hanseatic
1009, 1028, 1031
Harley Davidson 1069
Harman/Kardon 1064
Harwood
1008
HCM
1008, 1029
Headquarter
1065
Hewlett Packard 1016
Hinari
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
Hisawa
1024
Hitachi
1011, 1026, 1027, 1028,
1046, 1062
HNS
1110
Howard Computers
1016
HP
1016

HTS
1018
Hughes
1111, 1113, 1122
Hughes Network Systems
1110, 1116
Humax
1012, 1110, 1113
Hush
1016
Hypson
1008, 1009, 1024, 1029
iBUYPOWER 1016
Impego
1030
Imperial
1026
Inno Hit
1008, 1009, 1025, 1028,
1029, 1030
Innovation
1024
Instant Replay 1068
Interbuy
1008, 1031
Interfunk
1028
Intervision
1009, 1026
Irradio
1008, 1029, 1031
ITT
1027
ITV
1009, 1025, 1031
JC Penney
1064, 1065, 1068, 1070,
1071
JCL
1068
JVC
1007, 1018, 1027, 1039,
1064, 1065, 1066, 1067,
1078, 1089, 1092, 1093,
1094, 1095, 1113, 1208,
1209, 1212, 1213, 1215,
1218
Kaisui
1008, 1029
Karcher
1028
Kendo
1008, 1024, 1025, 1030
Kenwood
1027, 1064, 1065
Kodak
1068, 1071
Korpel
1008, 1029
Kyoto
1008
Lenco
1025
Leyco
1008, 1029
LG
1010, 1026, 1031, 1047,
1054, 1056, 1071, 1103,
1221
Lifetec
1024
Linksys
1016
Lloyd's
1069
Loewe Opta
1028, 1031
Logik
1008, 1029
Lumatron
1009, 1025
Luxor
1008
LXI
1071
M Electronic
1026

Magnavox
Magnin
Manesth
Marantz
Mark
Marta
Matsui
Matsushita
Media Center PC
Mediator
Medion
MEI
Memorex

1020, 1068, 1114, 1126
1071
1008, 1029
1028, 1064, 1065, 1068
1009
1071
1024, 1031
1068
1016
1028
1024
1068
1023, 1026, 1031, 1065,
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071,
1098, 1114
Memphis
1008, 1029
MGN Technology 1070
Micromaxx
1024
Microsoft
1016
Microstar
1024
Migros
1026
Mind
1016
Mitsubishi
1026, 1028, 1079
Motorola
1068
MTC
1070
Multitech
1008, 1026, 1028, 1029,
1030, 1069, 1070
Murphy
1026
NEC
1027, 1064, 1065
Neckermann
1027, 1028
NEI
1028
Nesco
1008, 1029
Nikkai
1008, 1009, 1030
Nikko
1071
Niveus Media 1016
Noblex
1070
Nokia
1009, 1027
Nordmende
1027
Northgate
1016
Oceanic
1026, 1027
Okano
1008, 1009, 1024
Olympus
1068
Optimus
1071
Orion
1023, 1024, 1051, 1115,
1217
Orson
1026
Osaki
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Otto Versand
1028
Palladium
1008, 1027, 1029, 1031

6

Panasonic

1000, 1022, 1044, 1055,
1068, 1072, 1085, 1090,
1091, 1120, 1121, 1214
Pathe Marconi 1027
Perdio
1026
Philco
1008, 1068
Philips
1006, 1013, 1028, 1035,
1040, 1045, 1046, 1050,
1058, 1059, 1061, 1068,
1076, 1101, 1110, 1113,
1116, 1117, 1122, 1126,
1210, 1211
Philips Magnavox 1076
Phonola
1028
Pilot
1071
Pioneer
1028, 1036
Polaroid
1088, 1099
Portland
1009, 1025, 1030
Prinz
1026
Profex
1029
Proline
1026
Proscan
1019
Prosonic
1009, 1024
Pulsar
1114
Pye
1028, 1102
Quarter
1065
Quartz
1065
Quasar
1068
Quelle
1026, 1028
Radialva
1008
RadioShack
1071
RadioShack/Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
Radiola
1028
Radix
1071
Randex
1071
RCA
1019, 1068, 1070, 1075,
1110, 1113, 1122, 1125
Realistic
1065, 1068, 1069, 1070,
1071
ReplayTV
1022, 1123
Rex
1027
RFT
1008, 1028, 1030
Ricavision
1016
Roadstar
1008, 1009, 1025, 1029,
1031
Royal
1008
Runco
1114
Saba
1027

Saisho
Samsung

1024, 1029
1002, 1034, 1041, 1043,
1057, 1060, 1070, 1084,
1110, 1116, 1122, 1124,
1220, 1222
Samurai
1008, 1030
Sanky
1114
Sansui
1023, 1027, 1106, 1115
Sanyo
1032, 1065, 1070
Saville
1009
SBR
1028
Schaub Lorenz 1026, 1027
Schneider
1008, 1009, 1024, 1025,
1026, 1028, 1029, 1030,
1031
Sears
1065, 1068, 1071
SEG
1008, 1009, 1029
SEI-Sinudyne 1028
Seleco
1027
Sentra
1008, 1030
Sentron
1008, 1029
Sharp
1003, 1033, 1077, 1107,
1127, 1219
Shintom
1008, 1029
Shivaki
1031
Shogun
1070
Siemens
1031
Silva
1031
Silver
1009
Singer
1068
Sinudyne
1028
Solavox
1030
Sonic Blue
1022, 1123
Sonneclair
1008
Sonoko
1009, 1025
Sontec
1031
Sony
1001, 1016, 1048, 1053,
1073, 1074, 1080, 1081,
1082, 1083, 1108, 1118,
1216
Stack
1016
Stack 9
1016
Standard
1009, 1025
Stern
1009
STS
1068
Sunkai
1024
Sunstar
1026
Suntronic
1026
Sunwood
1008, 1029
Superscan
1020

Sylvania

1020, 1068, 1069, 1102,
1126
Symphonic
1008, 1069, 1126
Systemax
1016
Tagar Systems 1016
Taisho
1024
Tandberg
1009
Tandy
1065
Tashiko
1026, 1071
Tatung
1026, 1027, 1028
TCM
1015, 1024, 1042
Teac
1009, 1069
Tec
1008, 1009, 1030
Technics
1068
Teknika
1068, 1069, 1071
Teleavia
1027
Telefunken
1027
Teletech
1008, 1009
Tenosal
1008, 1029
Tensai
1008, 1026, 1029, 1031
Tevion
1024
Thomson
1005, 1027
Thorn
1027
Tivo
1108, 1110, 1111, 1113,
1117, 1118, 1119, 1122
TMK
1070
Tokai
1008, 1029, 1031
Tonsai
1029
Toshiba
1004, 1016, 1027, 1028,
1037, 1049, 1052, 1086,
1087, 1097, 1109, 1112,
1194
Totevision
1070, 1071
Touch
1016
Towada
1008, 1029
Towika
1008, 1029
TVA
1030
Uher
1031
UltimateTV
1019
Ultravox
1009
Unitech
1070
United Quick Star 1009, 1025
Universum
1026, 1028, 1031
Vector Research 1064
Video Concepts 1064
Videon
1024
Videosonic
1070
Viewsonic
1016
Voodoo
1016
Wards
1068, 1069, 1070, 1071

Weltblick
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
Yoko
Zenith
ZT Group

1031
1068, 1069
1064, 1065
1008, 1029
1008, 1029
1008, 1029, 1030, 1031
1114
1016

DVD
4Kus
Accurian
Advent
AEG
Airis
Aiwa
Akai
Akura
Alba

2051
2142
2155, 2251
2362
2364
2322
2145, 2177, 2179, 2248
2356
2064, 2165, 2186, 2337,
2346
Alco
2149
Alize
2361
Allegro
2133
Amitech
2362
Amphion MediaWorks
2195
AMW
2195, 2363
Apex
2030, 2124, 2125, 2126,
2127, 2130, 2131
Apple
2241
Arrgo
2138
Asono
2364
Aspire
2152, 2222
Astar
2240
ATACOM
2364
Audiovox
2061, 2149
Avious
2367
Awa
2363
Axion
2249
Bang & Olufsen 2128
Baze
2367
BBK
2364
Bellagio
2363
Best Buy
2359
Blaupunkt
2131
Blue Parade
2157
Boghe
2382
Brainwave
2362

7

Brandt
Broksonic
Bush

2148, 2188
2145, 2146
2064, 2110, 2170, 2268,
2290, 2346, 2358, 2367,
2383
California Audio Labs
2151
Cambridge Audio 2354
CAT
2352, 2353
CAVS
2192
Centrum
2353
CGV
2354, 2362
Changhong
2140
Cinetec
2363
CineVision
2133, 2237
Clatronic
2358, 2367
Coby
2031, 2046, 2360
Conia
2383
Continental Edison
2363
Crown
2362
C-Tech
2355
Curtis Mathes 2139
CVG
2377
CyberHome
2022, 2098, 2138, 2187,
2336
Cytron
2244
Daenyx
2363
Daewoo
2001, 2133, 2276, 2298,
2330, 2362, 2363, 2377
Daewoo International
2363
Dalton
2357
Dansai
2362, 2381
Daytek
2184, 2195, 2363
Dayton
2363
DEC
2358
Decca
2362
Denon
2059, 2151, 2193, 2332
Denver
2356, 2358, 2360, 2370
Denzel
2380
Desay
2205
Diamond
2354, 2355
DiamondVision 2225, 2232
Disney
2010, 2028
DK Digital
2339
Dmtech
2176
Dual
2380
DUNE
2473
Durabrand
2136

DVX
2355
Easy Home
2359
Eclipse
2354
E-Dem
2364
Electrohome
2362
Elin
2362
Elta
2341, 2361, 2362
Emerson
2129, 2137, 2150
Enterprise
2129
Enzer
2380
Epson
2247
ESA
2137
Finlux
2354, 2362, 2367
Fintec
2377
Fisher
2134
Funai
2137
Gateway
2051
GE
2029, 2131, 2156
Gericom
2351
GFM
2226
Giec
2382
Global Solutions 2355
Global Sphere 2355
Go Video
2133, 2213
Goodmans
2165, 2280, 2291, 2358,
2371, 2376, 2382
GPX
2227
Gradiente
2151
Graetz
2380
Greenhill
2131
Grundig
2349
Grunkel
2362, 2366
GVG
2377
H&B
2358
H_her
2364
Haaz
2354, 2355
Haier
2254
Harman/Kardon 2047, 2135
HiMAX
2359
Hitachi
2062, 2090, 2115, 2274,
2316, 2359, 2380
Hiteker
2130
Home Tech Industries
2364
Hyundai
2366
Ilo
2245
Initial
2131, 2245
Innovation
2182
Insignia
2002, 2137, 2253
Integra
2157

Irradio
iSymphony
JBL
JVC

Jwin
Kansai
Kawasaki
Kennex
Kenwood
KeyPlug
Kiiro
Kingavon
Kiss
KLH
Koda
Koss
KXD
Landel
Lasonic
Lawson
Lecson
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG

Life
Lifetec
Limit
Liquid Video
Liteon
Loewe
LogicLab
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Marantz
Marquant
Matsui
McIntosh
Mecotek
Medion

2053
2246
2135
2020, 2096, 2097, 2099,
2100, 2101, 2102, 2103,
2106, 2107, 2160, 2257,
2260, 2262, 2263, 2321,
2324, 2326, 2327, 2343,
2464, 2465, 2468, 2469,
2471
2198
2360
2149
2362
2041, 2151, 2348
2362
2362
2358
2380
2131, 2149
2358
2013, 2148, 2158
2359
2143
2132
2355
2381
2358, 2362, 2367
2136, 2153
2002, 2033, 2038, 2057,
2129, 2133, 2189, 2191,
2223, 2238, 2270, 2288,
2335, 2373, 2375
2182
2182
2355
2158
2043, 2051, 2142
2320
2355
2025, 2050, 2137, 2150,
2159, 2224, 2230, 2358
2367
2360
2328
2362
2148, 2378
2199
2362
2182

Memorex
MiCO
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Microstar
Minoka
Minowa
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
Naiko
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
Next Base
Nexxtech
NU-TEC
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
Optim
Optimus
Orava
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
P&B
Pacific
Panasonic

Parasound
peeKTON

2028, 2145, 2234
2354, 2382
2182
2156
2182
2362
2367
2131, 2245
2003
2358, 2359
2380
2186
2354
2366
2362
2131
2380
2362
2143
2243
2383
2159, 2368
2051
2196, 2255
2381
2180
2358
2363
2073, 2110
2148, 2158
2358
2355
2011, 2024, 2034, 2042,
2058, 2062, 2066, 2067,
2093, 2116, 2117, 2118,
2119, 2120, 2121, 2122,
2123, 2151, 2159, 2164,
2166, 2167, 2172, 2173,
2175, 2209, 2214, 2275,
2277, 2278, 2281, 2282,
2283, 2301, 2374, 2470
2197
2364

8

Philips

Phonotrend
Pioneer

Pointer
Polaroid
Portland
Powerpoint
Prima
Proceed
Proscan
Prosonic
Protron
Provision
Pye
Qwestar
Raite
RCA
RedStar
Regent
Reoc
Rimax
Rio
Roadstar
Ronin
Rotel
Rowa
Rownsonic
Saba
Sabaki
Saivod
Sampo

2008, 2012, 2025, 2044,
2050, 2051, 2053, 2060,
2072, 2108, 2111, 2147,
2159, 2163, 2169, 2174,
2181, 2185, 2230, 2261,
2266, 2267, 2286, 2287,
2289, 2295, 2300, 2302,
2317, 2328, 2338, 2342,
2350, 2467
2367
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2035, 2092, 2094, 2095,
2109, 2157, 2180, 2190,
2212, 2269, 2272, 2299,
2304, 2305, 2306, 2307,
2308, 2309, 2310, 2311,
2344, 2345, 2347, 2379
2362
2125, 2215, 2235
2362
2363
2252
2130
2156
2360, 2377
2202
2358
2144
2148
2380
2021, 2029, 2104, 2105,
2131, 2149, 2156, 2157,
2229
2356, 2360, 2362
2153
2355
2361
2133
2331, 2358
2363
2203
2154, 2383
2353
2148, 2188
2355
2362
2141

Samsung

2000, 2045, 2077, 2112,
2113, 2114, 2115, 2151,
2200, 2216, 2219, 2228,
2264, 2265, 2271, 2279,
2294, 2303, 2329, 2365
Sansui
2073, 2145, 2354, 2355,
2362
Sanyo
2134, 2145, 2217, 2292
ScanMagic
2186
Schaub Lorenz 2362
Schneider
2176
Scientific Labs 2355
Scott
2161, 2357
Seeltech
2364
SEG
2161, 2355, 2363, 2380
Sharp
2006, 2040, 2088, 2091,
2182, 2194, 2220, 2221,
2231, 2236, 2293, 2340
Shinsonic
2245
Sigmatek
2359, 2364
Silva
2356
Singer
2354, 2355
Skymaster
2325, 2355
Skyworth
2356
Slim Art
2362
SM Electronic 2355
Sonic Blue
2133
Sontech
2366
Sony
2004, 2005, 2007, 2009,
2014, 2015, 2023, 2026,
2027, 2052, 2068, 2069,
2070, 2071, 2074, 2075,
2084, 2085, 2087, 2168,
2171, 2208, 2210, 2211,
2258, 2273, 2284, 2285,
2312, 2313, 2314, 2315,
2318, 2319, 2466
Soundmaster
2355
Soundmax
2355
Spectra
2363
Spectroniq
2201
Standard
2355
Star Cluster
2355
Starmedia
2358, 2364
Sungale
2204
Sunkai
2362
Superscan
2150
Supervision
2355
Sylvania
2012, 2137, 2150, 2178,
2230, 2239

Symphonic
Synn
T.D.E. Systems
Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
Technika
Telefunken
Tensai
Tevion
Theta Digital
Thomson
Tokai
Top Suxess
Toshiba

2108, 2230
2355
2366
2001, 2362
2182, 2297
2149, 2333, 2355, 2383
2356
2151
2362, 2367
2353
2362
2182, 2355, 2357
2157
2183, 2188, 2334, 2372
2356, 2380
2364
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2048, 2049, 2054, 2055,
2072, 2073, 2076, 2078,
2079, 2086, 2145, 2159,
2218, 2233, 2256, 2259,
2296, 2369, 2472
TRANScontinents 2363, 2367
Transonic
2367
Trio
2362
Trutech
2242
TruVision
2359
TSM
2364
Umax
2361
United
2367
Urban Concepts 2159
US Logic
2245
Venturer
2149
Viewmaster
2364
Vocopro
2206
VocoStar
2207
Waitec
2364
Welltech
2382
Westinghouse 2063, 2250
Wharfedale
2354, 2355
Woxter
2361, 2364
Xbox
2156, 2183
Xlogic
2355, 2362
XMS
2362
Xoro
2382
Yamada
2051, 2361, 2363
Yamaha
2056, 2064, 2065, 2080,
2081, 2082, 2083, 2089,
2118, 2151, 2323
Yamakawa
2363, 2380

Yukai
Zenith

2186
2002, 2129, 2133, 2159,
2223

Blu-ray Disc
Denon
Hitachi
JVC
LG
Marantz (US)
Mitsubishi
Onkyo
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Yamaha

2452, 2500, 2501
2460, 2461, 2463
2472, 2473, 2475, 2478,
2496, 2499, 2511
2033, 2456, 2457
2454, 2455
2450, 2451
2504
2011, 2209, 2214, 2476,
2477, 2479
2510
2212, 2506
2045, 2113, 2498
2194, 2220, 2221, 2497,
2502, 2503
2075, 2453, 2458, 2459,
2507
2462
2064, 2448, 2449, 2474,
2505

DVR
Bush
Hitachi
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Toshiba
Victor
Yamaha

2110
2090
2066, 2067, 2093, 2116,
2117, 2119, 2120, 2122,
2123
2108, 2111
2016, 2017, 2018, 2019,
2092, 2094, 2095, 2109
2105
2113, 2219
2088, 2091
2084, 2085, 2087
2086, 2218
2475
2089, 2118

9

DVD Recorder
Aspire
Astar
Broksonic
Go Video
Hitachi
Insignia
Irradio
JVC
LG
Liteon
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
Sony
Sylvania
Toshiba
Yamaha

2222
2240
2146
2213
2062
2002
2053
2100, 2101, 2106, 2107
2033, 2057, 2223, 2238
2043
2011, 2034, 2058, 2062,
2116, 2117, 2119, 2120,
2121, 2123
2008, 2044, 2050, 2051,
2147
2017, 2035
2144
2000, 2112, 2216
2073
2217
2004, 2005, 2007, 2052,
2068, 2069, 2074, 2208,
2210, 2211
2239
2032, 2036, 2037, 2039,
2049, 2054, 2055, 2076
2056

Cable
ABC
ADB
Adelphia
Alcatel
Americast
Amstrad
Antronix
Archer
Arcon
AT&T
Axis
Bell South
Cable Vision
Cabletenna
Cabletime

3002, 3003, 3017, 3066,
3067, 3086, 3093, 3119,
3122
3020
3081
3016
3124
3022, 3098
3065, 3070
3070
3098
3095
3098
3124
3092
3065
3104

Cableview
3087
Clearmaster
3127
ClearMax
3127
Clyde Cablevision 3105
Colour Voice
3068
Comcast
3084, 3088, 3117
Comcrypt
3107
Comtronics
3069
Contec
3074
Coolmax
3127
COX
3084
Cryptovision
3110
Director
3084
Eastern
3075
Everquest
3123
Fidelity
3098
Filmnet
3107
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3111
Filmnet Comcrypt
3111
Finlux
3097
FIOS
3004
Focus
3126
Foxtel
3022
France Telecom 3100, 3101
Freebox
3023
GC Electronics 3070
GE
3066, 3093
GEC
3105
Gemini
3072, 3123
General Instrument
3017, 3025, 3066, 3084,
3090, 3096, 3117
Goldstar
3120
Gooding
3099
Grundig
3098, 3099
Hamlin
3073, 3078
Hirschmann
3097
Hitachi
3066
HomeChoice
3106
Humax
3021, 3080, 3083
ITT Nokia
3097
Jasco
3123
Jerrold
3017, 3018, 3025, 3066,
3072, 3084, 3090, 3096,
3119, 3123
JVC
3099
Kabel Deutschland
3024, 3027, 3121

Macab
Magnavox
Maspro
Matsui
MegaCable
Memorex
Minerva
Mnet
Motorola

3101
3079
3099
3099
3117
3076, 3122
3099
3107
3025, 3026, 3084, 3088,
3090, 3095, 3117
Movie Time
3077, 3109
Mr Zapp
3101
Multichoice
3107
Multitech
3127
NEC
3064
NET Brazil
3085
Nokia
3097
Noos
3101
NSC
3077
Oak
3074
Pace
3006, 3089, 3121
Palladium
3099
Panasonic
3112, 3118, 3122
Paragon
3122
Philips
3068, 3071, 3079, 3099,
3100, 3101, 3103
Pioneer
3001, 3006, 3094, 3098,
3114, 3116, 3120
Popular Mechanics
3126
Proscan
3066, 3093
Pulsar
3122
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3018
Quasar
3122
RadioShack
3123, 3127
RCA
3030, 3031, 3087, 3118
Realistic
3070
Recoton
3126
Regal
3078
Regency
3075
Rembrandt
3066
Runco
3122
Sagem
3101
Samsung
3069, 3089, 3114, 3120
SAT
3098
Scientific Atlanta 3000, 3001, 3002, 3003,
3006, 3028, 3029, 3081,
3086, 3089, 3094, 3095,
3108

Signal
3072, 3123
Signature
3066
Sony
3092, 3125
Sprucer
3118
Standard Component
3115
Starcom
3017, 3072, 3119, 3123
Stargate
3072, 3123
Starquest
3072, 3123
Supercable
3090
Supermax
3127
Tele+1
3107, 3111
TELENET
3007
Telepiu
3107
Thomson
3082, 3091
TIME WARNER 3084
Tocom
3067
Torx
3017
Toshiba
3122
Tristar
3127
Tudi
3102
Tusa
3072, 3123
TV86
3077
Unika
3065, 3070
United Cable
3018, 3119
Universal
3065, 3070
Universum
3097, 3099
V2
3127
Videoway
3019
View Star
3074, 3077, 3079
Viewmaster
3127
Vision
3127
Visiopass
3097, 3100, 3101
Vortex View
3127
Wittenberg
3098
Zenith
3113, 3122, 3124
Zentek
3126

Satellite
AB Sat
AccessHD
ADB
AGS
Akai
Alba
Aldes
Allsat

4216, 4217
4104
4220
4216
4053, 4055
4001, 4004, 4006, 4007,
4062, 4217
4005, 4007, 4010
4048, 4053, 4055

10

Allsonic
Alltech
Alpha
Alpha Digital
Alphastar
Amitronica
Amstrad
Anglo
Ankaro
Anttron
Apollo
Armstrong
Artec
Asat
ASLF
Astacom
Astra

4005, 4008, 4024
4217
4053
4104
4077
4217
4011, 4035, 4217, 4218
4217
4005, 4008, 4024, 4217
4001, 4004
4001
4011, 4053
4100
4053, 4055
4217
4216
4009, 4011, 4054, 4217,
4219
Astro
4004, 4008, 4010, 4015,
4024, 4213, 4218, 4219
AudioTon
4004, 4048
Aurora
4222
Austar
4222
Axiel
4216
Axis
4008, 4009, 4024, 4050
BBK
4205
Best
4008, 4024
Blaupunkt
4015
Blue Sky
4217
Boca
4011, 4054, 4059, 4217
Boston
4216
Brain Wave
4013
Broadcast
4012
Broco
4217
BSkyB
4035, 4041
BT
4216
Bubu Sat
4217
Bush
4006, 4045
Cambridge
4218
Canal Satellite 4213
Canal+
4213
CaptiveWorks 4099
Channel Master 4007, 4110
Chaparral
4075
CHEROKEE
4216
Chess
4212, 4217
CityCom
4006, 4215, 4219
Clatronic
4013
CNT
4010

Comag

4080, 4081, 4082, 4083,
4086
Commlink
4005
Comtech
4050
Condor
4008, 4024, 4219
Connexions
4014, 4024
Conrad
4024, 4215, 4218, 4219
Conrad Electronic 4217, 4219
Contec
4050
Coolsat
4096
Cosat
4048
Coship
4109
Crown
4011
Daeryung
4014
Daewoo
4057, 4217
DDC
4007
Delega
4007
Dew
4050
Diamond
4051
Digiality
4219
Digital Stream 4105
DIRECTV
4056, 4064, 4067, 4068,
4070, 4071, 4074, 4107,
4116, 4119, 4121, 4122,
4123, 4127, 4192, 4193,
4194, 4195, 4196, 4197,
4198, 4199, 4200, 4201,
4202, 4203, 4206, 4207,
4221
Discoverer
4212
Discovery
4216
Diseqc
4216
Dish Network 4018, 4065, 4089, 4092,
4094, 4095, 4117
Dishpro
4018, 4117
Distrisat
4053
Ditristrad
4048
DNT
4014, 4053, 4055
Drake
4072
DStv
4222
Dune
4024, 4240, 4242
Echostar
4014, 4018, 4065, 4089,
4117, 4217
Einhell
4001, 4005, 4011, 4217,
4218
Elap
4216, 4217
Elekta
4010
Elsat
4217
Elta
4001, 4008, 4024, 4048,
4053, 4055

Emanon
Emme Esse
Engel
Ep Sat
EURIEULT
Eurodec
Europa
Europhon
Eurosat
Eurosky

4001
4008, 4024
4217
4006
4031
4052
4053, 4218, 4219
4219
4011
4008, 4011, 4215, 4218,
4219, 4024
Eurostar
4011, 4215, 4219
Eutelsat
4217
Exator
4001, 4004
Expressvu
4117
Fenner
4024, 4212, 4217
Ferguson
4006, 4052, 4214
Fidelity
4218
Finlandia
4006
Finlux
4006
FinnSat
4050, 4052
Flair Mate
4217
Foxtel
4222
Freecom
4001, 4049, 4218
FTEmaximal
4024, 4217
Fuba
4001, 4008, 4014, 4015,
4024, 4055, 4215
Galaxis
4005, 4008, 4009, 4024,
4048, 4050, 4215, 4222
GE
4066, 4093, 4111, 4197
General Instrument
4019, 4073
GMI
4011
GOI
4117
Goldbox
4213
GoldStar
4049
Goodmans
4002, 4006, 4029
Goodmind
4111
Grandin
4031
Grothusen
4001, 4049
Grundig
4004, 4006, 4015, 4035,
4211, 4218, 4222
Hänsel & Gretel 4219
Hantor
4001, 4013
Hanuri
4010
Hauppauge
4044
Heliocom
4219
Helium
4219
Hinari
4007

Hirschmann

4015, 4024, 4210, 4216,
4218, 4219
Hisawa
4013
Hisense
4016
Hitachi
4006, 4114, 4199, 4203
Homecast
4084, 4085, 4087
Houston
4048
HTS
4117
Hughes
4064, 4068, 4192, 4194,
4196, 4202
Hughes Network Systems
4071
Humax
4025, 4030, 4060, 4097
Huth
4005, 4011, 4012, 4013,
4048, 4050, 4219, 4223
Hypson
4031
Ilo
4016
Imex
4031
Innovation
4008
Insignia
4107
Intertronic
4011
Intervision
4048, 4219
ITT Nokia
4006
Jerrold
4019
Johansson
4013
JOK
4216
JSR
4048
JVC
4029, 4065, 4089, 4117
Kamm
4217
Kathrein
4015, 4034, 4042, 4053,
4055, 4063, 4215, 4216,
4217
Kathrein Eurostar 4215
Klap
4216
Konig
4219
Kosmos
4049
KR
4004
Kreiselmeyer
4015
K-SAT
4217
Kyostar
4001
L&S Electronic 4024
Lasat
4008, 4010, 4024, 4054,
4212, 4215, 4219
Lasonic
4108
Lenco
4001, 4024, 4049, 4215,
4217, 4219
Leng
4013
Lennox
4048
Lenson
4218
Lexus
4053

11

LG
Lifesat
Lifetec
Lorenzen
Lorraine
Lupus
Luxor
Lyonnaise
Macab
Magnavox
Manata
Manhattan
Marantz
Mascom
Maspro
Matsui
Max
Mediabox
Mediamarkt
Mediasat
Medion
Medison
Mega
Memorex
Metronic

4049, 4103, 4107
4008, 4024, 4212, 4217
4008
4219
4049
4008, 4024
4218
4052
4052
4127, 4101
4031, 4216, 4217
4006, 4010, 4048, 4216
4055
4010
4006, 4217
4216
4219
4213
4011
4009, 4213, 4218
4008, 4024, 4217
4217
4053, 4055
4127
4001, 4004, 4005, 4010,
4028, 4031, 4217
Metz
4015
Micro electronic 4217, 4218, 4219
Micro Technology 4217
MicroGem
4106
Micromaxx
4008, 4024
Microstar
4008
Microtec
4217
Minerva
4015
Mitsubishi
4006, 4015, 4202
Mitsumi
4054
Morgan's
4011, 4053, 4054, 4055,
4217
Motorola
4019, 4088, 4090, 4091
Multichoice
4222
Multitec
4212
Muratto
4049
Mysat
4217
Navex
4013
Neuhaus
4009, 4048, 4217, 4218,
4219
Neusat
4217
Next Level
4019
NextWave
4223
Nikko
4011, 4217

Nokia
Nordmende
Nova
Novis
Oceanic
Octagon
Okano
Optex
Optus
Orbitech
OSat
Otto Versand
Pace
Pacific
Packsat
Palcom
Palladium
Palsat
Panasat
Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
PCT
Philco
Philips

Phoenix
Phonotrend
Pioneer
Polsat
Predki
Premiere
Priesner
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Prosat
Proscan
Protek
Proton
Provision
Quadral

4006, 4040
4001, 4006, 4007, 4010,
4052
4222
4013
4051
4001, 4004, 4050
4011
4048
4213, 4222, 4223
4001, 4212, 4213, 4218
4004
4015
4006, 4015, 4035, 4043,
4047, 4204, 4216, 4243
4051
4216
4007
4011, 4218
4212, 4218
4222
4006, 4035, 4036, 4121,
4124, 4126, 4198, 4221
4006, 4219
4125
4216
4127
4110
4101
4006, 4033, 4053, 4055,
4061, 4068, 4071, 4127,
4196, 4201, 4202, 4203,
4206, 4213, 4216
4050
4006, 4005, 4048
4046, 4213
4052
4013
4048, 4213
4011
4076
4216
4006
4005, 4007
4066, 4093, 4122, 4197
4051
4016
4010
4005, 4007, 4008, 4216,
4024

Quelle
Quiero
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
Rainbow
RCA
Realistic
Redpoint
Redstar
RFT
Roadstar
Roch
Rover
Saba
Sabre
Sagem
Sakura
Samsung
SAT
Sat Cruiser
Sat Partner
Sat Team
Satcom
Satec
Satelco
Satford
Satmaster
Satplus
Schneider
Schwaiger
SCS
Seemann
SEG
Seleco
Servi Sat
Siemens
Silva
Skantin
Skardin
Skinsat
SKR
Skymaster
Skymax

4015, 4215, 4219
4052
4019
4053, 4055
4014, 4037
4004
4066, 4093, 4112, 4113,
4116, 4118, 4119, 4197,
4122, 4207
4078
4009
4008, 4024
4005, 4053, 4055
4217
4031
4024, 4217
4010, 4215, 4216, 4219
4006
4023, 4052
4050
4000, 4001, 4003, 4032,
4064, 4069, 4071, 4120,
4123, 4196, 4200
4007, 4218
4223
4001, 4004, 4010, 4013,
4049, 4218
4217
4012, 4219
4217
4024
4012
4012
4212
4008, 4212, 4216
4051, 4212, 4219
4215
4009, 4011, 4014
4001, 4008, 4013, 4024
4048
4031, 4217
4015
4049
4217
4009
4218
4217
4005, 4017, 4022, 4212,
4217
4053, 4055

SkySat
Skyvision
SM Electronic
Smart
Sony
SR
Star Choice
Starland
Starring
Start Trak
Strong
STS
STVI
Sumida
Sunny Sound
Sunsat
Sunstar
Supermax
Tandberg
Tandy
Tantec
TCM
Techniland
TechniSat
Technology
Technosat
Technowelt
Teco
Telanor
Telasat
Telecom
Telefunken
Teleka
Telemaster
TELENET
Telesat
Telestar
Televes
Telewire
Tempo
Tevion
Thomson
Thorens
Thorn

4212, 4217, 4218, 4219
4048
4212, 4217
4215, 4217
4067, 4070, 4213
4011, 4054
4019
4217
4013
4001
4001, 4004, 4008, 4024,
4049, 4222
4115
4031
4011
4024
4217
4011, 4024, 4054
4223
4052
4004
4006
4008
4012
4014, 4021, 4026, 4027,
4038, 4039, 4053, 4212,
4213, 4218
4222
4223
4219
4011, 4054
4007
4215, 4219
4217
4001, 4017, 4216
4004, 4011, 4014, 4218,
4219
4010
4241
4219
4212, 4213, 4218
4006, 4218
4048
4223
4008, 4217
4006, 4020, 4052, 4058,
4208, 4213, 4215, 4216,
4217, 4219
4051
4006

12

Tivax
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Toshiba
Triad
Triasat
Triax
Turnsat
Tvonics
Twinner
UEC
Uher
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
Unitor
Universum
US Digital

4104
4196
4053
4006, 4012, 4048, 4217,
4218
4194, 4202, 4203
4049
4218
4015, 4215, 4217, 4218
4217
4214
4031, 4217
4222
4212
4070
4079, 4127
4011, 4050, 4053
4013
4015, 4215, 4219
4016

Variosat
Vega
Ventana
Viewsat
Visiosat
Voom
Vortec
Welltech
WeTeKom
Wevasat
Wewa
Winersat
Wisi
Woorisat
Worldsat
Xrypton
XSat
Zehnder
Zenith
Zodiac

4015
4024
4053, 4055
4098
4013, 4048, 4216, 4217
4019
4001
4212
4212, 4218
4006
4006
4013
4006, 4014, 4015, 4218,
4219
4010
4216
4024
4217
4008, 4209, 4010, 4215,
4024
4102, 4107, 4195
4004

CD
Yamaha

LD
5082, 5095

Yamaha

CD Recorder

Amplifier

Yamaha

Yamaha

5083

MD
Yamaha

5019, 5020, 5098

Apple TV
5080, 5081, 5086

Apple

2241

“Apple TV” is a trademark or registered mark
of Apple Inc.

Tape
Yamaha

2080

5084, 5087

Tuner
Yamaha

5066, 5085, 5088, 5090,
5092

© 2012 Yamaha Corporation

YE161A0/RC



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Print, Extract, Print high-res
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Modify Date                     : 2012:03:26 14:25:47-07:00
Create Date                     : 2012:02:16 14:34:30+09:00
Metadata Date                   : 2012:03:26 14:25:47-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:9ae81e29-2d6d-4dbe-b98a-ce5dfe563b1a
Instance ID                     : uuid:8d6adff1-54ae-45c7-b5aa-2762aa4d7b44
Has XFA                         : No
Page Count                      : 133

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools